Service - Manual: Catalogue Number

Service - Manual
BW 24 R
S/N 201 530 60 1456 ›
Rubber tire roller
Catalogue number.
008 910 64 06/2006
Table of Contents
General 5
1.1 Introduction 6
1.2 Safety regulations 7
1.3 General repair instructions 10
1.4 Tightening torques 13
Technical data 15
2.1 Technical data 17
2.2 Maintenance chart 20
2.3 Table of fuels and lubricants 22
2.4 Fuels and lubricants 22
Fundamental electrics 25
3.1 Understanding circuit diagrams 27
3.2 Terminal designations 31
3.3 Current and voltage 35
3.4 Resistance 39
3.5 Series / parallel connection 41
3.6 Ohm's law 42
3.7 Electrical energy 43
3.8 Formula diagram 44
3.9 Metrology 45
3.10 Diodes, relays, fuses 47
3.11 Batteries 49
3.12 Three-phase generator 53
3.13 Electric starter 58
3.14 Telemecanique switch 61
3.15 Inductive proximity switches 62
3.16 Deutsch plug, series DT and DTM 63
3.17 Plugs and terminals in spring clamping technology 67
Special tools, electrics 71
4.1 Special tools, electrics 72
Workshop Manual 79
5.1 Speedometer Module 81
5.2 Removing and installing the engine 85
5.3 Rear axle 93
5.4 Front axle 111
5.5 Drive shaft 131
5.6 Steering 135
5.7 Service Brake 151
5.8 Parking brake 165
5.9 Wheels 169
Suppliers documentation 175
6.1 Powershift transmission 177
6.2 Differential gear 363
Circuit diagrams 379
7.1 Wiring diagram 381
7.2 Pneumatic diagram 395
008 910 64 BOMAG 3

Table of Contents
Supplement to circuit diagram 399

8.1 Control elements in circuit diagram 400
8.2 Monitoring module A15 in circuit diagram 404
4 BOMAG 008 910 64

1 General
008 910 64 BOMAG 5

1.1 Introduction
1.1 Introduction This training manual has not only been written as a
support for the professional work of the trainer, but
This manual contain all necessary information for also for the trainees attending these training courses.
training and repair work.
The different levels of product training demand, that
The repair instructions describe the removal or dis- the training performed by BOMAG, its Profit Centres
mantling and assembly of components and assembly or its dealers reflects the high quality of the training
groups. conducted at the Training Centre at BOMAG in Bopp-
The repair of disassembled assembly groups is de- ard. For this reason we invested a lot of time in the
scribed as far as this makes sense with respect to preparation of these materials.
available tools and spare parts supply and as far as it
Documentation
can be understood by a skilled mechanic.
For the BOMAG machines described in this training
manual the following documentation is additionally
Danger
! available:
Danger of injury 1 Operating and maintenance instructions
Please observe strictly the safety regulations in 2 Spare parts catalogue
this manual, in the operating instructions as well 3 Wiring diagram*
as the applicable accident prevention regulations.
4 Hydraulic diagram*
Spare parts needed for repairs can be taken from the 5 Service Information
spare parts catalogue for the machine.
Reliable construction equipment is of benefit for all You should only use genuine BOMAG spare parts.
parties involved: This manual is not subject of any updating service; we
● they enable the customer/user to exactly calculate would therefore like to draw your
the running times and the completion of projects attention to the additionally published "technical serv-
within the specified time. ice information".
In case of a new release all necessary changes will be
● in the rental business machines can be reliably
included.
used and planned, so that the number of stock ma-
chines can be kept at a low level. In the course of technical development we reserve the
right for technical modifications without prior notifica-
● for the manufacturer satisfied customers provide a
tion.
good image and give a feeling of confidence.
Information and illustrations in this manual must not
It is BOMAG's philosophy to design and produce the be reproduced and distributed, nor must they be used
machines with highest possible reliability. This aspect for the purpose of competition. All rights according to
of simple and easy maintenance was one of the key the copyright law remain expressly reserved.
issues when developing and designing the machine:
BOMAG GmbH
●
the location of components in the machine eases
maintenance work, Printed in Germany
Copyright by BOMAG
● the high quality standard of BOMAG is the basis for
the considerable extension of the service and main- * The applicable documents valid at the date of print-
tenance intervals. ing are part of this manual.
● the After Sales Service of BOMAG, including excel-
lent operating and maintenance instruction manu-
als, high quality training courses and on-site
machine demonstrations helps the customer to
maintain their machines in good condition over a
long period of time.
Permanent training of BOMAG’s own service person-
nel as well as the service personnel of BOMAG Profit
Centres and dealers is therefore a general prerequi-
site for BOMAG’s excellent world-wide service.
This program of permanent training is only possible
with appropriate and up-to-date training material for
trainers as well as persons attending the training
courses.
6 BOMAG 008 910 64

Safety regulations 1.2
Important notes ● Tools, lifting gear, lifting tackle, supports and other
1.2 Safety regulations
auxiliary equipment must be fully functional and in

These safety regulations must be read and ap- safe condition.
plied by every person involved in the repair of this
machine. The applicable accident prevention in-
● Use only safe and approved lifting gear of sifficient
load bearing capacity to remove and install parts or
structions and the safety regulations in the oper-
components from and to the machine.
ating and maintenance instructions must be
additionally observed. ● Be careful with cleansing agents. Do not use easily
inflammable or harmful substances, such as gaso-
Repair work shall only performed by appropriately line or paint thinners for cleaning.
trained personnel or by the after sales service of
BOMAG.
● Cleaning or repair work on the fuel tank is very dan-
gerous. Do not smoke or allow any ignitable sparks
This manual contain headers like "Note", "Attention",
or open fire in the vicinity when cleaning or repairing
"Danger" and "Environment", which must be strictly
a tank. .
complied with in order to avoid dangers for health and
for the environment. ● When performing welding work strictly comply with
the respective welding instructions.
Danger
!
Special safety regulations
Paragraphs marked like this highlight possible
dangers for persons. ● Use only genuine BOMAG spare parts for repair
purposes. Original parts and accessories have
been specially designed for this machine.
Caution
!
●
We wish to make explicitly clear that we have not
Paragraphs marked like this highlight possible
tested or approved any parts or accessories not
dangers for machines or parts of the machine.
supplied by us. The installation and/or use of such
products may therefore have an adverse effect on
i Note the specific characteristics of the machine and
Paragraphs marked like this contain technical infor- thereby impair the active and/or passive driving
mation for the optimal economical use of the machine. safety. The manufacturer explicitly excludes any li-
ability for damage caused by the use of non-original
parts or accessories.
Environment ●
Unauthorized changes to the machine are prohibit-
Paragraphs marked like this point out practices ed for safety reasons.
for safe and environmental disposal of fuels and
lubricants as well as replacement parts. ●
If tests on the articulated joint need to be performed
with the engine running, do not stand in the articu-
Observe the regulations for the protection of the lation area of the machine, danger of injury!
environment.
●
Do not perform cleaning work while the engine is
running.
General
● If tests must be performed with the engine running
● Before starting repair work stand the machine on do not touch rotating parts of the engine, danger of
level and solid ground. injury.
●
Always secure the machine against unintended roll- ●
Exhaust gases are highly dangerous. Always en-
ing. sure an adequate supply of fresh air when starting
● Secure the engine reliably against unintentional the engine in closed rooms.
starting. ● Refuel only with the engine shut down. Ensure strict
●
Mark a machine that is defective or being repaired cleanliness and do not spill any fuel.
by attaching a clearly visible warning tag to the ●
Keep used filters in a separate waste container and
steering wheel. dispose of environmentally.
●
On machines with articulated joint keep the articu- ●
Dispose of oils and fuel environmentally when per-
lated joint locked during work. forming repair or maintenance work.
●
Use protective clothes like hard hat, safety boots ●
Do not refuel in closed rooms.
and gloves.
● Do not heat up oil higher than 160 °C because it
● Keep unauthorized persons away from the machine may ignite.
during repair work.
● Wipe off spilled oil and fuel.
008 910 64 BOMAG 7

1.2 Safety regulations
● Do not smoke when refuelling or when checking the ● In a refrigerant container there must be a steam
acid level in the battery. space above the liquid space. The liquid expands
with increasing temperature. The steam filled space
● Do not check the acid level of the battery with a na-
becomes smaller. From a certain time on the con-
ked flame, danger of explosion!
tainer will be filled with just liquid. After this only a
● Old batteries contain lead and must be properly dis- minor temperature increase is enough to generate
posed of. very high pressures in the container, because the
● There is a danger of scalding when draining off en- liquid would like to expand, but there is no more
gine or hydraulic oil at operating temperature. room. The related forces are high enough to cause
the container to burst. In order to avoid overfilling of
● on machines with rubber tires a tire may busr if in- a container the pressure gas directive clearly spec-
correctly assembled. This can cause severe injury. ifies how many kilograms of refrigerant may be filled
●
Do not exceed the specified highest permissible tire into the container per litre volume.
pressure. ● In case of occurring mechanical damage or corro-
sion on the refrigerant container, the container must
Hydraulics be replaced, in order to prevent it from bursting and
causing further damage.
● Hydraulic oil escaping under pressure can pene-
trate the skin and cause severe injury. You should ● Since the fluid container is pressurized, the manu-
therefore relieve the pressure in the system before facture and testing of these pressure vessels is gov-
disconnecting any lines. erned by the pressure vessel directive. (New edition
from April 1989). This directive divides the pressure
●
Before applying pressure to the system make sure
vessels into test groups according to their permissi-
that all line connections and ports have been prop-
ble operating pressure "p" in bar, the volumetric
erly tightened and are in perfect condition.
content "l" in litres and the pressure content product
●
Hydraulic oil leaking out of a small opening can "p x l". . On the basis of these pre-
hardly be noticed, therefore please use a piece of requisites the fluid containers must be classified as
cardboard or wood when checking for leaks. When per testing group II. Paragraph 10 of the pressure
being injured by hydraulic oil consult a physician im- vessel directive demands that these pressure con-
mediately, as otherwise this may cause severe in- tainers must be periodically inspected and tested by
fections. a specialist, according to paragraph 32. .
●
Do not step in front of or behind the drums/wheels/ In this case periodically recurring inspections con-
crawler tracks when performing adjustment work in sist of external examinations, normally on contain-
the hydraulic system while the engine is running. ers in operation . The refrigerant container
Block drums and/or wheels / crawler tracks with must be visually examined twice every year in con-
wedges. nection with the inspection. Special attention
must thereby be paid to signs of corrosion and me-
Reattach all guards and safety installations after chanical damage. If the pressure vessel is in
all work has been completed. no good condition, it should be replaced for safety
reasons, thus to make sure that sufficient precau-
Air conditioning system tions have been applied to protect the operator and
third parties. .
● Wear safety goggles! Put on your safety goggles.
This will protect your eyes against coming into con-
! Danger tact with refrigerant, which could cause severe
Do not open refrigerant containers which contain damage by freezing.
refrigerant! ●
Wear safety gloves and an apron! Refrigerant are
● When opening refrigerant containers the contents excellent solvents for greases and oils. In contact
may escape in liquid or vaporous state. The higher with skin they will remove the protective grease film.
the pressure in the container, the fiercer this proc- However, degreased skin is very sensitive against
ess will take place. The height of the pressure de- cold temperatures and germs.
pends on two conditions. 1. Which type of ●
Do not allow liquid refrigerants to come into contact
refrigerant is in the container. The following applies: with skin! Refrigerant takes the heat required for
The lower the boiling point, the higher the pressure. evaporation from the environment. Very low tem-
2. The height of the temperature. The following ap- peratures may be reached. The results may be local
plies: The higher the temperature, the higher the frost injuries (boiling point of R134a -26.5°C at am-
pressure. bient pressure).
8 BOMAG 008 910 64

Safety regulations 1.2
● Do not inhale higher concentrations of refrigerant
vapours! Escaping refrigerant vapours will mix with
the ambient air and displace the oxygen required for
breathing.
● Smoking is strictly prohibited! Refrigerants may be
decomposed by a glowing cigarette. The resulting
substances are highly toxic and must not be in-
haled.
●
Welding and soldering on refrigeration equipment!
Before starting welding or soldering work on vehi-
cles, (in the vicinity
of air conditioning components) all refrigerant must
be drawn out and the rests removed by blowing out
the system with nitrogen. The decomposition prod-
ucts created from the refrigerant under the influence
of heat not only are highly toxic, but also have a
strong corrosive effect, so that pipes and system
components may be attacked. The substance is
mainly fluorohydrogen.
● Pungent smell! In case of a pungent smell the afore
mentioned decomposition products have already
been created. Extreme care must be exercised not
to inhale these substances, as otherwise the respi-
ratory system, the lungs and other organs may be
harmed.
●
When blowing out components with compressed air
and nitrogen the gas mixture escaping from the
components must be extracted via suitable exhaust
facilities (workshop exhaust systems).
Handling pressure vessels

●
Secure pressure vessels against tipping over or roll-
ing away
●
Do not throw pressure vessels. Pressure vessels
may thereby be deformed to such an extent, that
they will crack. The sudden evaporation and escape
of refrigerant releases excessive forces. This ap-
plies also when snapping off valves on bottles. Bot-
tles must therefore only be transported with the
safety caps properly installed.
● Refrigerant bottles must never be placed near heat-
ing radiators. Higher temperatures will cause higher
pressures, whereby the permissible pressure of the
vessel may be exceeded. The pressure vessel di-
rective therefore specifies that a pressure vessel
should not be warmed up to temperatures above 50
°C.
●
Do not heat up refrigerant bottles with an open
flame. Excessive temperatures can damage the
material and cause the decomposition of refriger-
ant.
● Close empty vessels to avoid the diffusion of mois-
ture.
● Do not overfill refrigerant bottles, since any temper-
ature increase will cause enormous pressures.
008 910 64 BOMAG 9

1.3 General repair instructions
General ● Fill new hydraulic units with hydraulic oil before

starting operation.
●
Before removing or disassembling and parts, hoses
or components mark these parts for easier assem- ● After changing a component thoroughly flush and
bly. bleed the entire hydraulic system.
● Before assembly oil or grease all parts, as far as this ● Perform measurements at operating temperature of
is necessary. the hydraulic oil (approx. 40 °C).
● After changing a component perform a high and
Hydraulic system charge pressure test, if necessary check the speed
of the exciter shaft.
Caution
!
● The operating pressure of the exciter shaft to a
great extent depends on the base under the vibrat-
Do not open any hydraulic components if you
ing drum. If the soil is too hard place the drums on
have not been properly trained and without exact
old rubber tires. Do not activate the vibration on a
knowledge.
hard, concreted base, danger of bearing damage.
Please note ● After the completion of all tests perform a test run
Cleanliness is of utmost importance. Make sure that and then check all connections and fittings for leaks
no dirt or other contaminating substances can enter with the engine still stopped and the hydraulic sys-
into the system. tem depressurized.
● Clean fittings, filler covers and the area around such Before commissioning
parts before disassembly to avoid entering of dirt.
●
After changing a component clean the hydraulic oil
● Before disconnecting hoses, pipes or similar relieve tank thoroughly.
the system pressure with the engine shut down.
●
Fill the housings of hydraulic pumps and motors
● During repair work keep all openings closed with with hydraulic oil.
clean plastic plugs and caps.
●
Use only hydraulic oils according to the specifica-
● Do not run pumps and motors without oil. tion in the maintenance instructions.
● When cleaning hydraulic components take care not ●
After changing a component clean the hydraulic
to damage any fine machine surfaces. system as described in the flushing instructions in
● Chemical and rubber soluble cleansing agents may order to prevent all other components from being
only be used to clean metal parts. Do not use such damaged by abrasion and metal chips remaining in
substances to clean seals and gaskets. the system.
● Rinse of cleaned parts thoroughly, dry them with ●
Change the hydraulic oil filter.
compressed air and apply anti-corrosion oil immedi-
Commissioning
ately. Do not install parts that show traces of corro-
sion. ●
Bleed the hydraulic circuits.
● Avoid the formation of rust on fine machined caused ●
Start up the system without load.
by hand sweat. ● Check the hydraulic oil level in the tank, fill up oil if
●
Grease must not used as a sliding agent for assem- necessary.
bly work. Use hydraulic oil.
After commissioning
● Do not start the engine after the hydraulic oil has ● Check system pressures and speeds.
been drained off.
●
Check fittings and flanges for leaks.
● Use only the specified pressure gauges. Risk of
damaging the pressure gauges under too high pres- ●
After each repair check all adjustment data, rota-
sure. tional speeds and nominal values in the hydraulic
system, adjust if necessary.
● Clean ports and fittings before removal so that no
dirt can enter into the hydraulic system. ●
Do not adjust pressure relief valves and control
valves to values above their specified values.
●
Check the hydraulic oil level before and after the
work.
Seals and gaskets
● Use only clean oil according to specification.
● Generally use new seals and gaskets when per-
●
Check the hydraulic system for leaks, find and rec-
forming assembly work. The required seal kits are
tify the cause.
available as spare parts.
10 BOMAG 008 910 64

General repair instructions 1.3
Electrics the immediate vicinity of the welding location. Strict-
ly disconnect the cables from the generator before
starting work.
The electric and electronic systems in construction ● Do not disconnect or connect battery or generator
equipment are becoming more and more extensive. while the engine is running. Do not operate the main
Electronic elements are increasingly gaining impor- battery switch under load. Do not use jump leads af-
tance in hydraulic and mechanical vehicle systems. ter the battery has been removed.
Diagnostics according to plan ● Sensors and electric actuators on control units must
A structured approach in trouble shooting saves time never be connected individually or between exter-
and helps to avoid mistakes and expenses, especially nal power sources for the purpose of testing, but
in the fields of electrics and electronics. Understand- only in connection with the control unit in question,
ing electronic controls requires the knowledge of as otherwise there may be a risk of destruction
some basic terms concerning their general perform- (damage)!
ance. In many cases error logs are just simply read ● Even with an existing polarity reversal protection in-
out and control units are replaced without any further correct polarity must be strictly avoided. Incorrect
trouble shooting. This is in most cases unnecessary polarity can cause damage to control units!
and, even more important, very expensive. ● Plug-in connectors on control units are only dust
Random tests have revealed that purely electronic and water tight if the mating connector is plugged
components or control units only very rarely are the on! Control units must be protected against spray
actual cause of failures: water, until the mating connector is finally plugged
●
In approx. 10 % of the examined cases the prob- on!
lems were caused by control units. ●
Disconnecting the control unit plug connectors with
●
In approx. 15 % sensors and actuators were the the control unit switched on, i.e. with the power sup-
cause of the problems. ply (terminal 15 "On"), is not permitted. Switch the
voltage supply "off" first - then pull out the plug.
By far the highest proportion of all faults could be
traced back to wiring and connections (plugs, etc.).
Air conditioning system
General:
CFC - halon prohibition
●
Before changing any expensive components, such
The CFC - halon prohibition from May 06, 1991 regu-
as control units, you should run a systematic trouble
lates the withdrawal from the use of CFC and the han-
shooting session to eliminate any other possible
dling of these refrigerants.
fault sources. Electric signals must be checked at
the locations to which they are applied, i.e. on con- Contents:
trol unit or sensor technology. So, if the system had Since 1995 CFC (R12) is no longer permitted for use
been diagnosed without unplugging the control unit in new systems.
and checking the wiring, one should be alerted.
In operation, during maintenance and repair work and
● Check for good cable and ground contacts, there- when taking refrigeration systems our of service it is
fore keep all mechanical transition points between not permitted to let refrigerant escape into the atmos-
electric conductors (terminals, plugs) free of oxide phere, which would contradict the current status of
and dirt, as far as this is possible. technology.
●
Perform trouble shooting in a systematic way. Do Work on refrigeration systems must only be carried
not become confused by the high number and vari- out by persons with well founded knowledge about
ety of electric cables, current can only flow in a such systems and who have the necessary technical
closed circuit. You should first become acquainted equipment available.
with the function of the corresponding electric circuit
The use of refrigerant must be documented.
by following the correct wiring diagram. Detected
faults should be rectified immediately. If the system Old systems should be converted to refrigerants
still does not work correctly after this measure, trou- harmless to ozone (refrigerant substitutes).
ble shooting must be continued. Several faults very For this reason the Federal Environmental Agency at
rarely occur at the same time, but it is not impossi- the end of 1995 published suitable replacement refrig-
ble. erants for R 12. As a consequence old systems must
●
Surge voltages in the electric system must be strict- no longer be filled with R12. As soon as such a system
ly avoided: For electric and inert gas welding all is opened for service, the system must be converted
electric components, battery and generator must be to a suitable replacement or service refrigerant. Old
electrically isolated. When performing welding work systems may still be used, as long as they are leak
always fasten the earth clamp of the welding unit in tight. R 134a was nominated as replacement for R 12.
008 910 64 BOMAG 11

Inside the European Union the "EU-Directive 2037/ ● When replacing a heat exchanger, e.g. evaporator
2000 on substances causing decomposition of the or condenser, any compressor oil / refrigeration oil
ozone layer" regulates the production, use and avail- lost by exchanging the components, must be re-
ability of CFC and H-CFC. placed with fresh oil.
● A too high compressor oil / refrigeration oil level ad-
versely affects the cooling performance and a too
Notes on repair low oil level has a negative effect on the lifetime of
● In case of a repair on the refrigeration system you the compressor.
should first evacuate the air conditioning system for ●
If a air conditioning unit needs to be opened, the
at least 45 minutes to remove any moisture from the
dryer must be replaced in any case.
system, before you start to refill. Moisture bonded in
the compressor oil / refrigeration oil (PAG oil) can ● Always use new O-rings when reassembling the
only be removed from the system by changing the unit.
oil. ● Always use two spanners when connecting pipes or
● During repair work on refrigerant lines and compo- hoses, to prevent the pipe end from being dam-
nents, these must be kept closed as far as possible, aged.
in order to prevent the invasion of air, moisture and ● Tighten screw fittings with the specified torque.
dirt, because the operational reliability of the system
can only be assured if all components in the refrig-
● Check the connections of pipes, fittings or compo-
erant circuit are clean and dry from inside. nents thoroughly; do not use if damaged.
●
Make sure that no dirt or foreign parts can enter into
● Do not leave the refrigerant circuit unnecessarily
the compressor or the air conditioning system. The open to the atmosphere. Do not attempt to repair
area around the refrigerant hoses should be bent or burst pipes.
cleaned with a gasoline free solvent. ●
Compressor valves must only be opened after the
●
All parts to be reused should be cleaned with a system has been properly sealed.
gasoline free solvent and blow-dried with clean ●
The use of leak detection colouring matter is not
compressed air or dried with a lint-free cloth. permitted, because its chemical composition is un-
●
Before opening all components should have known and its effect on compressor oil and rubber
warmed up to ambient temperature, to avoid that elements is not predictable. The use of leak detec-
damp air is drawn into the component by the differ- tion colouring matter makes any warranty claims
ence in temperatures. null and void.
●
Damaged or leaking parts of the air conditioning
●
Tools used on refrigeration circuits must be of ex-
must not be repaired by welding or soldering, but cellent condition, thus to avoid the damage of any
must generally be replaced. connections.
●
Do not fill up refrigerant, but extract existing refrig-
●
The dryer is to be installed last, after all connections
erant and refill the system. in the refrigerant circuit have been tightened.
●
Different types of refrigerant must not be mixed.
● After completion of repair work screw locking caps
Only the refrigerant specified for the corresponding (with seals) on all connections with valves and on
air conditioning system must be used. the service connections. Start up of the air condi-
tioning system. Observe the filling capacity.
●
Refrigerant circuits with refrigerant type R134a
must only be operated with the compressor oil / re-
●
Before start up of the air conditioning system after a
frigeration oil approved for the compressor. new filling: - Turn the compressor approx. 10 revo-
lutions by hand using the clutch or V-belt pulley of
●
Used compressor oil / refrigeration oil must be dis- the magnetic clutch. - Start the engine with the com-
posed of as hazardous waste. pressor/control valve switched off. - Once the idle
● Due to its chemical properties compressor oil / re- speed of the engine has stabilized switch on the
frigeration oil must never be disposed of together compressor and run it for at least 10 minutes at idle
with engine or transmission oil. speed and maximum cooling power.
●
Compressor oil / refrigeration oil is highly hydro- ●
Never operate the compressor over longer periods
scopic. Oil cans must strictly be kept closed until of time with high engine speeds without a sufficient
use. Oil rests should not be used, if the can had amount of refrigerant in the system. This could
been opened over a longer period of time. probably cause overheating and internal damage.
● All O-rings as well as pipe and hose fittings must be
oiled withcompressor oil / refrigeration oilibefore as-
sembly.
12 BOMAG 008 910 64

Tightening torques 1.4
Tightening torques
1.4 Tightening torques
●
Tighten fastening screws and nuts according to the table of tightening torques.
● Tightening torques deviating from the ones in the table are specially mentioned in the repair instructions.
Caution
!
Self-locking nuts must be generally renewed.
Tightening torques for screws with metric unified thread
Tightening torque Nm* (ft-lb)

Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 3 (2) 5 (4) 5 (4)
M5 6 (4) 9 (7) 10 (7)
M6 10 (7) 15 (11) 18 (13)
M8 25 (18) 35 (26) 45 (33)
M10 50 (37) 75 (55) 83 (61)
M12 88 (65) 123 (91) 147 (108)
M14 137 (101) 196 (145) 235 (173)
M16 211 (156) 300 (221) 358 (264)
M18 290 (213) 412 (303) 490 (361)
M20 412 (304) 578 (426) 696 (513)
M22 560 (413) 785 (559) 942 (695)
M24 711 (524) 1000 (738) 1200 (885)
M27 1050 (774) 1480 (1092) 1774 (1308)
M30 1420 (1047) 2010 (1482) 2400 (1770)
Tightening torques for screws with metric fine thread
Tightening torques Nm1 (ft-lb)

Screw dimension
8.8 10.9 12.9
M8 x 1 26 (19) 37 (27) 48 (35)
M10 x 1.25 52 (38) 76 (56) 88 (65)
M12 x 1.25 98 (72) 137 (101) 126 (119)
M12 x 1.5 93 (69) 127 (94) 152 (112)
M14 x 1.5 152 (112) 216 (159) 255 (188)
M16 x 1.5 225 (166) 318 (235) 383 (282)
M18 x 1.5 324 (239) 466 (344) 554 (409)
M20 x 1.5 461 (340) 628 (463) 775 (572)
M22 x 1.5 618 (456) 863 (636) 1058 (780)
M24 x 2 780 (575) 1098 (808) 1294 (1416)
M27 x2 1147 (846) 1578 (1164) 1920 (1416)
M30 x 2 1568 (1156) 2254 (1662) 2695 (1988)
1 Strength classes for screws with untreated, non-lubricated surface.
The values result in a 90% utilization of the screw’s yield point at a coefficient of friction μ total = 0,14.
Compliance with the tightening torques is checked with torque wrenches.
Tightening torques deviating from the ones mentioned in the table are specially mentioned in these descriptions.
The values specified in the table apply for screws black, oiled and with surface protection A4C.
The quality designation of the screws is stamped on the screw heads.
008 910 64 BOMAG 13

1.4 Tightening torques
14 BOMAG 008 910 64

2 Technical data
008 910 64 BOMAG 15

16 BOMAG 008 910 64
2.1 Technical data
BOMAG Central Service - Technical data and adjustment values
Status: 2006-04-12
Product type: BW 24 R
Type No.: 530 60
Serial numbers from: 201 530 60 1456
Engine:
Type: 4BT 4.5C / 74 KW
Combustion principle: 4-stroke-Diesel
Cooling: Water
Number of cylinders: 4
Power acc. to ISO 9249: 74 kW
Power data at nominal speed of: 2200 1/min
Low idle speed: 850+/-150 1/min
High idle speed: 2375+/-125 1/min
Spec. fuel consumption: 233 g/kWh
Valve clearance, inlet: 0,25 mm
Valve clearance, outlet: 0,51 mm
Opening pressure, injection valves: 240-254 bar
Starter voltage: 12 V
Powershift reversing transmission:

Type: 1203 FT 20302-10/4
Number of gears forward/reverse: 3/3
Transmission ration 1st gear forward: 0-6 km/h
Transmission ration 2nd gear forward: 0-13 km/h
Transmission ration 3rd gear forward : 0-20 km/h
Transmission ration 1st gear reverse: 0-6 km/h
Transmission ration 2nd gear reverse: 0-13 km/h
Transmission ratio 3rd gear reverse: 0-20 km/h
Steering valve:
Type: LAGC 200 LSD
System: Rotary valve
Filling capacities:
Engine coolant: 15 l (50% Water, 50% Anti-freeze agent on
Ethane-diol-basis)
Engine oil: 15,5 l (SAE 15W-40, API SJ/CF)
Hydraulic oil: 6,5 l (HVLP 46 VI 150)
Torque converter, powershift transmission: 22 l (ATF Dexron II D)
17 BOMAG 008 910 64

Technical data 2.1
Fig. 1
Dimensions in A B H H1 K L W
mm
BW 24 R 3800 2265 2315 3040 300 4775 1986
1 BW 24 R
Weights
Operating weight (CECE) with kg 10000
ROPS-cabin
Operating weight, pre-ballasted kg 15400
Max. operating weight (CECE) kg 24000
Max. operating weight with water kg 18400
Max. axle load (CECE), front kg 11400
Max. axle load (CECE), rear kg 12600
Min. wheel load (without ballast) kg 1300
Max. wheel load kg 3150
Travel characteristics
Travel speed (1) km/h 0 ... 6
Max. gradability % 35
Engine
Engine manufacturer Cummins
Type 4BT4.5-C99
Cooling Water
Number of cylinders 4
Power ISO 9249/SAE J 1995 kW 71/74
Rated speed rpm 2200
Fuel Diesel
Electrical equipment V 12
Drive system hydrostatic
Driven axles 2
008 910 64 BOMAG 18

2.1 Technical data
1
BW 24 R
Brakes
Service brake pneum./hydr.
Parking brake mech./pneum.
Steering
Type of steering 2-point suspension
Steering operation hydrostatic
Tires
Tire size 11.00-20, 18 PR smooth
Air pressure min./max. bar 2 ... 8,1
Tank contents
Water Litres 400
Fuel Litres 250
Engine oil Litres 15,5
Coolant Litres approx. 15
1 The right for technical modifications remains reserved
19 BOMAG 008 910 64

Maintenance chart 2.2
2.2 Maintenance chart
With all maintenance intervals perform also the
work for shorter preceding service intervals.
No. Designation Note
Every 10 operating hours

5.6 Check the engine oil level Dipstick mark
5.7 Checking, cleaning the water separator
5.8 Checking the fuel filter water separator
5.9 Checking the brake fluid level
5.10 Checking the V-belt
5.11 Checking the coolant level
5.12 Checking the water level in the sprinkler system
5.13 Checking the fuel level
5.14 Draining the air pressure vessel
5.15 Checking the oil level in the steering oil tank
5.16 Checking the oil level in the powershift transmission Inspection glass
5.17 Checking, cleaning the scraper brushes
5.18 Changing engine oil and oil filter cartridge1 min. 1x per year
5.19 Checking, cleaning the cooling systemKühlanlage
prüfen, reinigen
5.20 Checking the parking brake, lubricating the linkage
5.21 Lubricating the propshaft
5.22 Checking the oil level in the differential
5.23 Checking the oil level in the gear housings
5.24 Checking, lubricating the front wheel bearings
5.25 Lubricating the pendulum joints of the front wheels
5.26 Lubricating the steering linkage
5.27 Servicing the battery distilled water, pole grease
5.28 Changing the oil filter for the powershift transmission
5.29 Checking the cleanliness of the pressure air for the
brake system
5.30 Changing the fuel filter cartridge
5.31 Draining the sludge from the fuel tank
5.32 Checking the brake linings
5.33 Checking V-belt tension, idler pulley and fan hub
5.34 Changing the oil in the powershift transmission min. 1x per year
5.35 Changing the oil in the differential min. 1x per year
5.36 Changing the air drier for the brake system min. 1x per year
5.37 Checking the braking and steering system min. 1x per year
5.38 Checking the fastenings on the diesel engine
5.39 Checking, adjusting the valve clearance Intake = 0,25 mm (0,010 IN), exhaust = 0,50
mm (0.020 IN, with cold engine)
008 910 64 BOMAG 20

2.2 Maintenance chart
No. Designation Note

5.40 Changing oil and filter in the steering oil tank
5.41 Changing the brake fluid at least every 2 years
5.42 Changing the oil in the gear housings at least every 2 years
5.43 Changing the coolant at least every 2 years
5.44 Checking the supply lines for the compressor
As required
5.45 Checking, cleaning, changing the combustion air fil- min. 1x every year, safety cartridge at least
ter, every 2 years
5.46 Cleaning the water sprinkler system
5.47 Maintenance in case of frost
5.48 Bleeding the fuel system
5.49 Filling the windscreen washer system
5.50 Changing the fresh air filter in the cabin
5.51 Adjusting the brake
5.52 Changing the tires
5.53 Checking bolted connections for tight fit
5.54 Temporary taking out of service
1 When using engine oil of class API CC/CD or CD/SF the oil change intervals must be reduced to half.
21 BOMAG 008 910 64

Table of fuels and lubricants 2.3
2.3 Table of fuels and lubricants
Assembly Fuel or lubricant Quantity approx.
Summer Winter Attention

Observe the level marks
Engine Engine oil CCMC-D4 or without oil filter change
API: CE/SG approx. 15,5 litres
SAE 15W/40
(-15 °C to +40 °C)
Fuel
Diesel Winter diesel fuel approx. 250 litres
Hydraulic system (steer- Hydraulic oil (ISO), HV46, kinem. viscosity 46 mm2/s approx. 6,5 litres
ing) at 40 °C
Level compensation, front Hydraulic oil (ISO), HV46, kinem. viscosity 46 mm2/s approx. 6 litres
axle at 40 °C
Powershift transmission ATF Dexron II D approx. 22 litres
(-34 °C to +60 °C)
Differential Gear oil SAE 80W/90, API GL5 approx. 13,5 litres
Gear housings Gear oil SAE 80W/90, API GL5 approx. 5,2 litre per side
Cooling system Coolant approx. 15 litres
Sprinkler system Water approx. 400 litres
Brake system DOT 3, SAE J 1703F, ISO 4925 approx. 0,75 litres
Lubrication points lithium saponified multi-purpose grease, penetration as required

2
2.4 Fuels and lubricants
Engine oil
The use of high-quality HD brand oils in connection
with the specified filter and oil change intervals results
in a longer lifetime and a higher performance of the
engine.
Do not use running-in oil for new or overhauled en-
gines.
Oil viscosity
CUMMINS preferably recommends oils of viscosity
class SAE 15W-40.
In order to assure perfect cold starting it is import to
chose the viscosity (SAE-class) of the engine oil ac-
cording to the ambient temperature.
008 910 64 BOMAG 22

2.4 Fuels and lubricants
Fuels
Quality
Use only commercially available brand diesel fuels
with a low sulphur content.
Ensure strict cleanliness when filling in fuel.
Use only winter-grade diesel fuel under low ambient
temperatures.
The fuel level should always be topped up in due time
so that the fuel tank is never run dry, as otherwise filter
and injection lines need to be bled.
The following fuel specifications are permitted:
Fig. 2
CEN EN 590, DIN/EN 590;
Lubrication oil with a too high viscosity index causes
starting difficulties. The temperature when starting the DIN 51 601;
engine is therefore of highest importance when Nato Codes: F-54, F-75;
choosing the viscosity of engine oil for winter opera- BS 2869: A1 and A2;
tion.
ASTM D 975-78: 1-D and 2-D.
Occasional falling short of the temperature limit (e.g.
use of SAE 15W/40 down to -15 °C) may effect the VV-F-800C: DF-A, DF-1, DF-2.
cold starting ability of the engine, but will not cause
any engine damage. Winter fuel
Temperature related lubrication oil changes can be
avoided by using multi-purpose oils. The following oil ! Danger
change intervals apply also when using multi-purpose Danger of explosion!
oils.
Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline or alcohol.
Oil quality Use only winter-grade diesel fuel for winter opera-
tion, in order to avoid clogging by paraffin separa-
Lubrication oils are classified according to their per-
tion. At very low temperatures disturbing paraffin
formance and quality class. Specifications according
separation can also be expected when using win-
to API (American Petroleum Institute) and CCMC
ter diesel fuel.
(Committee of Common Market Automobile Construc-
tors) are commonly used. In most cases a sufficient cold resistance can also be
achieved by adding flow enhancing fuel additives.
Permitted API-oils
API = CE/SG Hydraulic oil
Permitted CCMC-oils The hydraulic system (steering) is operated with hy-
draulic oil of quality ISO 6743/4 HM or HV (DIN 51524
CCMC = D5
part 2 or 3; CETOP RP 91 H) with a kinematic viscos-
If no oil of quality class CE/SG is available, you may ity of 46 mm2/s at 40 °C (ISO VG 46).
also use oils of quality class CC/CD or CD/SF, when
In countries with permanently high temperatures
shortening the oil change intervals to half.
(tropical zones), where the hydraulic oil temperature
can reach 80 °C (104 °F), a hydraulic oil with a kine-
Lubrication oil change intervals matic viscosity of 68 mm2/s at 40 °C (ISO VG 68) may
The longest permissible time a lubrication oil should be used.
remain in an engine is 6 months. If the following oil In countries with temperatures permanently below –
change intervals are not reached over a period of 6 10 °C (14 °F), where the hydraulic oil temperature only
months, the oil change should be performed at least reaches 30 °C (86 °F), a hydraulic oil with a kinematic
every 6 months, irrespective of the operating hours viscosity of 32 mm2/s at 40 °C (ISO VG 32) may be
reached. used.
API: CE = 250 operating hours For topping up or for oil changes use only high quality
CCMC/D5 = 250 operating hours hydraulic oil corresponding with the permitted specifi-
cations.
API: CC/CD = 125 operating hours
23 BOMAG 008 910 64

Fuels and lubricants 2.4
Oil for powershift transmissions tion is required. However, the proportion of
cooling system protection agent should never ex-
The powershift transmission must be filled with the fol-
ceed 68%. A higher concentrations the frost pro-
lowing oil:
tection effect drops again.
DEXRON II D series at temperatures from -34 °C (-30
The cooling system must be permanently moni-
°F) to 60 °C (140 °F)
tored. Besides the inspection of the coolant level
Always use the same type of oil for topping up. this includes also the inspection of the concentra-
tion of cooling system protection agent.
! Caution Coolant must be changed every two years.
Do not use any multi-purpose engine oils such as
e.g. 15W/40. Environment
Cooling system protection agents must be dis-
Oil for differential, gear housings posed of environmentally.
Use only transmission oil of API-class GL5 with a vis-
Water quality:
cosity class SAE 80W/90.
100 (mg/dm3) of sulphate
The additives in this oil ensure low wear lubrication
under all operating conditions. 100 (mg/dm3) chloride.
water hardness (°dGH) = 3 to 12
Lubrication grease pH-value = 6,5 to 8,5.
For lubrication use only EP-high pressure grease, lith-
Specification for cooling system protection agent
ium saponified (penetration 2).
ASTM 4985 (GM6038M)
Brake fluid Anti-freeze concentration
Ethylene Glycol
! Danger 40 % = -23 °C (-23,33 °C)
Danger of poisoning! Danger to life when consum- 50 % = -37 °C (-36,67 °C)
ing brake fluid.
60 % = -54 °C (-53,89 °C)
Store brake fluid only in original cans.
68 % = -71 °C (-67,78 °C)
Never fill brake fluid into beverage containers.
Propylene Glycol
Change the brake fluid at least every two years.
40 % = -21 °C (-21,11 °C)
Do not fill in mineral oil.
50 % = -33 °C (-32,78 °C)
Use only brake fluid of specification ISO 4925, SAE J
60 % = -49 °C (-48,89 °C)
1703f, DOT 3.
68 % = -63 °C (-82 °F)
The brake fluid has been chosen for ambient temper-
atures from -50 °C (-58 °F) to 60 °C (140°F) and work-
ing temperatures from -50 °C (-58 °F) to 205 °C (400
°F). You may also use brake fluids of specification
DOT 4 (Syntol HD 260).
Coolant
As a protection against frost, corrosion and boiling
point anti-freeze agents must be used under any cli-
matic conditions.
! Caution
Do not mix different coolants and additives of any
other kind.
If no cooling system protection agent is available
in tropical zones, you may also use a corrosion
protection agent (CUMMINS Liquid DCA).
Do not mix in more than 50% cooling system pro-
tection agent, except when a lower frost protec-
008 910 64 BOMAG 24

3 Fundamental electrics
008 910 64 BOMAG 25

26 BOMAG 008 910 64
Understanding circuit diagrams 3.1
3.1 Understanding circuit dia- ● The sequence in which current flows through the in-
dividual elements in the electric circuit.
grams ● Connections between the examined, faulty electric
Wiring diagrams are graphical representations of cir- circuit and other circuits in the vehicle wiring sys-
cuitry conditions, related to the electrical system. They tem.
do not contain any information about the actual type of ● Pin assignment of plug-and-socket connections.
wiring, they only serve the purpose of visualizing the
circuitry logics. Structure:
The wiring diagram is indispensable for effective and
● Table of contents
systematic trouble shooting in the vehicle wiring sys- ● Function groups
tem. This plan provides the following information: ● List of components
● Number and type of individual elements in the ex-
amined electric circuit, such as plug connectors, Table of contents
fuses, switches, consumers, relays, ... The table of contents lists all function groups.
Fig. 3 Table of contents
Example:
Function group "Warning systems“, drawing number
XXX XX can be found on page no. 8.
008 910 64 BOMAG 27

3.1 Understanding circuit diagrams
Function groups ● From top (plus potential) to bottom (minus poten-

On the individual pages the electric circuits are com- tial).
bined to function groups. ● From left to right.
● From function group to function group.
Arrangement of current paths
● Via cross references for potentials and relays.
The individual current paths must be read as follows:
Fig. 4 Function groups Relay cross reference

Potential cross references Relay cross references serve the tracking of signals,
which need to be tracked for components with outgo-
Potential cross references serve the purpose of track-
ing contacts.
ing signals, which are transmitted from one function
group to another. A mimic diagram with information about the contact
types of a relay and their positions in the wiring dia-
Example: gram is additionally attached to the bottom of each
Potential "15" on page no. 6 is continued to the left on contactor coil.
page no. 4 in current path "10" and to the right on page
Example:
no. 8 in current path "1“.
The coil of relay (K99) is located on page no. 8 in cur-
rent path "6".
The mimic diagram under the relay informs that a
change-over switch with contact types 30, 87 and 87a
is triggered.
The changeover contact can be found on page no. 8
in current path "3".
28 BOMAG 008 910 64

Understanding circuit diagrams 3.1
Current paths
The pages of a circuit diagram are sub-divided into
current paths (Fig. 5) (0 ..... 20).
Fig. 5 Current paths
List of components
Here you find all components used in alphabetical or-
der, related to the name of the component (A01,
A02....).
Fig. 6 List of components
Component cross references
Example:
The warning horn "B 11" is located on page no. 8 in
current path 3.
008 910 64 BOMAG 29

3.1 Understanding circuit diagrams
Graphic symbol serves the purpose of global understanding and fault

free connection of appliances, especially in automo-
Graphic symbols are standardized representations for
bile repairs.
electrical appliances. They serve the purpose of a
simplified representation of complete systems, from Since the wiring diagram is intended to show only the
which, however, the function can be clearly identified. most essential aspects, the graphic symbol only
This standardization is in compliance with the globally shows as much of the function, as is needed for easy
valid regulations of the IEC (International Electrical recognition and for the avoidance of mistakes.
Commission). For Germany these symbols were in-
cluded in the DIN-Standard. The standardization
Fig. 7 Graphic symbol

1 Current source
2 Conductor
3 Switch
4 Ground
5 Filament lamp
6 Filament lamp with two luminous elements
7 Voltmeter
8 Ampere meter
9 Resistance
10 Backup
11 Line connection (fixed)
12 Line connection (separable)
Fig. 8 Graphic symbol

1 Diode
2 Transistor
3 NPN-Transistor
4 changeable resistance
5 Condenser
6 Working current relay
30 BOMAG 008 910 64

Terminal designations 3.2
3.2 Terminal designations
For easier connection work almost every connection
on a consumer or switch used in a motor vehicle has
a terminal designation. In Germany the designation of
the individual connection terminals is determined by
the standard DIN 72552. The following table repre-
sents a section with the most important terminals from
this standard.
Terminal designa- Meaning

tion
1 Ignition coil, ignition distributor low voltage
1a Ignition distributor with 2 separate electric circuits, to ignition timer 1
1b Ignition distributor with 2 separate electric circuits, to ignition timer 2
2 Short circuit terminal (magneto ignition)
4 Ignition coil, ignition distributor high voltage

4a Ignition distributor with 2 separate electric circuits, from ignition coil 1, terminal 4
4b Ignition distributor with 2 separate electric circuits, from ignition coil 2, terminal 4
15 Switch plus (after battery) : Output of ignition-travel switch

15a Output from dropping resistor to ignition coil and starter
17 Preheating starter switch, preheating
19 Preheating starter switch, starting
30 Battery plus direct

30a Battery changeover relay 12V / 24V, input from battery 2 plus
31 Battery minus direct or ground

31a Battery changeover relay 12V / 24V return line to battery 2 minus
31b Return line to battery minus or ground via switch or relay (switched minus)
31c Battery changeover relay 12V / 24V return line to battery 1 minus
32 Electric motors, return line
33 Electric motors, main connection

33a Electric motors, limit shut down
33b Electric motors, shunt field
33f Electric motors, for 2nd lower speed range
33g Electric motors, for 3rd lower speed range
33h Electric motors, for 4th lower speed range
33L Electric motors, counter-clockwise rotation
33R Electric motors, clockwise rotation
45 Starter, separate starter relay output; starter: Input (main current)

45a 2-starter parallel operation, start relay for engagement current, output starter 1
45b 2-starter parallel operation, start relay for engagement current, output starter 2
48 Terminal on starter and on start repeat relay, monitoring of starting process
49 Input flasher relay

49a Output flasher relay
49b Flasher relay output 2nd flasher circuit
49c Flasher relay output 3rd flasher circuit
008 910 64 BOMAG 31


tion
50 Starter, starter control
50a Battery changeover relay, output for starter control
50b Starter control, parallel operation of 2 starters with sequence control
50c Start relay for sequence control of engagement current in parallel operation of 2
starters, input in starter relay for starter 1
Start relay for sequence control of engagement current in parallel operation of 2
starters, input in starter relay for starter 2
50d Start locking relay, input
50f Start locking relay, output
50g Start repetition relay, input
50h Start repetition relay, output
51 A.C.-generator, direct voltage on rectifier

51a A.C.-generator, direct voltage on rectifier with reactance coil for day travel
52 Trailer signals: further signals from trailer to towing vehicle
53 Wiper motor input (+)

53a Wiper motor (+) end limit shut down
53b Wiper shunt winding
53c Electric windscreen washer pump
53e Wiper, braking effect
53i Wiper motor with permanent magnet and 3rd brush for higher speed
54 Trailer signals, trailer plug device and lamp combination, brake light
54g Trailer signals, compressed air valve for permanent brake in trailer, electromag-
netically operated
55 Fog light
56 Head light
56a Head light, travel light and travel light control
56b Head lights, dimmed head light
56d Head lights, flash light
57 Parking light for motor cycles (abroad also for cars and trucks)
57a Parking light
57L Parking light left
57R Parking light right
58 Side lights, tail light, number plate light, dashboard light

58b Tail light changeover for single axle trailers
58c Trailer plug for single core wired and trailer fused tail light
58d Adjustable dashboard light, tail light and side light
58L Side light, left
58R Side light, right
59 A.C.-generator (magneto generator), alternating voltage output or rectifier input

59a A.C.-generator, charging armature output
59b A.C.-generator, tail light armature output
59c A.C.-generator, brake light armature output
61 Generator control
71 Intermittent tone control unit, input

71a Intermittent tone control unit, output to horn 1 + 2 (low)
71b Intermittent tone control unit, output to horn 3 + 4 (high)
32 BOMAG 008 910 64

Terminal designations 3.2
tion
72 Alarm switch (flashing beacon)
75 Radio, cigarette lighter
76 Loudspeaker
77 Door valve control
81 Switch (breaker and two-way contact), input

81a Switch (breaker and two-way contact), output 1
81b Switch (breaker and two-way contact), output 2
82 Switch (maker), input

82a Switch (maker), output 1
82b Switch (maker), output 2
82z Switch (maker), input 1
82y Switch (maker), input 2
83 Switch (multi-position switch), input

83a Switch (multi-position switch), output position 1
83b Switch (multi-position switch), output position 2
83L Switch (multi-position switch), output position left
83R Switch (multi-position switch), output position right
84 Current relay, input drive and relay contact

84a Current relay, output drive
84b Current relay, output relay contact
85 Switching relay, output drive winding end (minus or ground)
86 Switching relay, input drive winding start

86a Switching relay, input drive winding start 1st winding
86b Switching relay, input drive winding start 2nd winding
87 Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, input

87a Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, output 1 (breaker side)
87b Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, output 2
87c Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, output 3
87z Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, input 1
87y Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, input 2
87x Relay contact on breaker and two-way contact, input 3
88 Relay contact for maker

88a Relay contact on maker and two-way contact, (maker side) output 1
88b Relay contact on maker and two-way contact, (maker side) output 2
88c Relay contact on maker and two-way contact, (maker side) output 3
88z Relay contact on maker, input 1
88y Relay contact on maker, input 2
88x Relay contact on maker, input 3
B+ Battery Plus
B- Battery Minus
D+ Dynamo Plus
D- Dynamo Minus
DF Dynamo field (generator excitation current)
DF1 Dynamo field 1 (generator excitation current)
008 910 64 BOMAG 33


tion
DF2 Dynamo field 2 (generator excitation current)
U Three-phase generator, three-phase terminal

V Three-phase generator, three-phase terminal
W Three-phase generator, three-phase terminal
C Travel direction indicator (flasher relay) control light 1

C0 Main connection for control light separated from flasher relay
C2 Travel direction indicator (flasher relay) control light 2
C3 Travel direction indicator (flasher relay) control light 3 (e.g. for 2 trailer operation)
L Indicator left
R Indicator right
34 BOMAG 008 910 64

Current and voltage 3.3
3.3 Current and voltage The following statements concerning electric volt-
age can be made
● electric voltage is the pressure or force applied to
General
free electrons.
If one wants to describe electric current, this can most ● the electric voltage is the cause of electric current
simply be accomplished by means of a comparison:
● electric voltage is a result of the equalization at-
One simply compares electric current with water. tempt of electric charges.
Voltage is measured with a Voltmeter.
Voltage
Unit, Volt
The electric voltage (U) is measured in Volt (V).
Fig. 1
1 (Fig. 1) Charge
2 Voltage
3 Current
The equalization attempt between different electric
charges is referred to as electric voltage.
Voltage sources have two poles of different charge.
On the one side we have the plus pole with a lack of
electrons, on the opposite side the minus pole with a
surplus of electrons. This electric "pressure" is known
as electric voltage.
Fig. 2
If there is a connection between these two poles a dis-
charge will take place, resulting in the flow of an elec-
tric current.
Plus pole= lack of electrons
Minus pole = excess of electrons
008 910 64 BOMAG 35

3.3 Current and voltage
Current Types of current

Electric current generally describes the directed Direct current (D.C.)
movement of charge carriers.
● The charge carriers may either be electrons or ions.
● Electric current can only flow if there is a sufficient
amount of free moving charge carriers.
● The higher the number of electrons flowing through
a conductor per second, the higher the amperage.
Current is measured with an ammeter.
Unit, Ampere Fig. 1 Direct current (D.C.)
The electric amperage (I) is measured in Ampere Direct current flows with steady voltage and amper-
(A). age from the plus to the minus pole.
Pure D.C.-voltages are only delivered by accumula-
The technical flow direction is specified from
tors or batteries.
PLUS to MINUS.
The voltage in the vehicle wiring system is no pure
D.C.-voltage. Even without the generator running, but
i Note the consumers switched on, the voltage is not con-
Current actually flows from minus to plus, because the stant, but drops gradually according to the battery
current flow is made up of negatively charged elec- charge condition.
trons.
The internal resistance of the battery also causes per-
But since this was only discovered after the poles of a manent changes in the vehicle voltage, as soon as
current source had already been designated, the as- consumers are switched on or off.
sumption that current flows from plus to minus was
maintained for historic reasons. Alternating current (A.C.)
Circuit
Fig. 2 Alternating current (A.C.)
Fig. 3 Circuit Alternating current not only changes its direction, but
also its amperage.
A simple circuit consists of a current source 1 (Fig. 3),
a consumer (3) and the connecting wiring. Pulsating direct current
When the circuit is closed, current can flow.
The circuit can be interrupted or closed with a switch
(2).
The system is protected by a fuse (4).
Fig. 3 Pulsating direct current

Converting alternating current into a direct current sig-
nal by means of a rectifier results in an pulsating direct
current.
36 BOMAG 008 910 64

Current and voltage 3.3
Pulse width modulation (PWM)
Fig. 4 PWM
The PWM signal is in most cases generated by a con-
trol and can be used to trigger proportional valves.
The signal (square wave signal) is changed in its
pulse control factor, the period, however, remains un-
changed.
The following applies:
●
The signal voltage cannot be measured.
●
The current can be measured.
Caution
!
Solenoid valves must not be interference sup-

pressed with suppressor diodes.
008 910 64 BOMAG 37

3.3 Current and voltage
Controller Area Network (CAN) Real-time critical, robust and low price communication
created by Bosch at the end of the eighties for auto- of control units, such as transmission and engine con-
mobile applications. trol, but also less time critical applications in the field
of convenience electronics, such as air conditioning.
Development objectives:
Fig. 5 CAN Characteristics of CAN

Why CAN? It is a kind of serial data transmission. The individual
bits are transmitted one after the other, only 2 lines are
● Networking of control units for the realization of
required.
complex functions.
●
Reduction of the extend of wiring and plug connec- CAN lines are twisted together 30 to 40 times per me-
tions. tre. Electromagnetic interferences therefore always
occur simultaneously in both lines, the software is
●
Better diagnostic possibilities (central diagnostics thus able to filter out interfering signals more easily.
socket).
Wire (+) = cable colour blue
Wire (-) = cable colour yellow
38 BOMAG 008 910 64

Resistance 3.4
3.4 Resistance ● The cleaner the contacts, the better the current.
● The quality of the ground cable is of the same im-
portance as the supply line.
Resistance and voltage drop
While current flows through a conductor the current
Unnecessary resistances
flow is more or less inhibited by the conductor, this in-
hibitation is referred to as Resistance. Unnecessary resistances are frequently caused by
mechanical connections, even clean ones, but mainly
soiled and oxidizes terminals, too thin cables, material
with poor conductivity or bent open cable lugs.
Bad
Fig. 1 Various size resistors

Fig. 1 Screw-type terminals
Each conductor has its specific resistance, which is
characteristic for the corresponding material. A good Copper wires are squashed and thus become faulty.
conductor has a low resistance, a poor conductor has
Better
a high resistance.
Fig. 2 Spring clamps

Connecting clamps for flexible conductors
BOMAG No. 057 565 72
Ampacity up to 20 Amp.
Cable cross-section 0.08 to 2.5 qmm
Fig. 2 Potentiometer, infinitely adjustable resistor
The resistance can only be measured with a Multime-
ter.
Symbol, R
Unit, Ohm
The electric resistance (R) is measured in Ohm.

Rule of thumb:
●
The thicker the cable cross-section, the lower the
voltage loss.
●
The shorter the cable, the better the current.
008 910 64 BOMAG 39

3.4 Resistance
Sometimes the flanks of flat plugs bend open. If these

are closed again with the help of pliers the flanks will
be excessively strained at the bend and will definitely
break sooner or later. It is better to place a small nail
under the bottom of the cable lug before bending.
Fig. 3
In many cases it is better to replace the contact. Soiled
or oxidized contacts should be cleaned with Ballistol
(Fig. 4) and subsequently wetted with copper paste.
Copper paste is a heat resistant grease, which has
been mixed with copper powder. The paste protects
electric contacts against oxidation. Copper paste
keeps water away.
Fig. 5
Hint for practice:
A tool you cannot buy. The pliers were converted, the
nail is permanently present.
Fig. 4 Balistol oil
40 BOMAG 008 910 64

Series / parallel connection 3.5
3.5 Series / parallel connection Parallel connection
In parallel connection all resistances (consumers) are
Series connection connected between feed and return line.
In a series circuit the resistors (consumers) are lined ● All resistances (consumers) are supplied with the
up one after the other and the same current (I) passes same voltage.
through each of the consumers However, series con- ● Each of the resistances (consumers) draws as
nection of consumers is not suitable in practice, as much current as required.
each resistance causes a voltage drop. In the vehicle
wiring system all consumers are designed for the
same vehicle voltage (e.g. 12 Volt).
Fig. 1 Series connection
Current
Fig. 2 Parallel connection
In series connection the current is identical at every
point. Current
Itotal = I1 = I2 = I3 The total current is the sum of all currents.
Itotal = I1 + I2 + I3
Voltage
The sum of all partial voltages is identical with the total Voltage
voltage. The voltage values are identical at every resistance
Utotal = U1 + U2 + U3 (consumer).
Utotal = U1 = U2 = U3
Resistance
The sum of all partial resistances is identical with the Resistance
total resistance. The total resistance is less than the lowest individual
Rtotal = R1 + R2 + R3 resistance.
Series connection of batteries Parallel connection of batteries

In order to achieve a vehicle voltage of 24 V two bat-
teries of the same type and capacity must be connect-
ed in series mode.
● In series connection the plus pole of the first battery
must be connected with the minus pole of the sec-
ond battery.
● The sum of all individual voltages is applied to the
free poles.
● The total capacity (Ah) is identical with the capacity
of the individual battery.
Fig. 3
By connecting 2 batteries of same type and capacity
in parallel mode the capacity can be doubled, be-
cause the individual capacities add up to the total ca-
pacity.
008 910 64 BOMAG 41

3.6 Ohm's law
● In parallel connection the plus pole of the first bat- 3.6 Ohm's law
tery is connected with the plus pole of the second
battery and the minus pole of the first battery with In a closed electric circuit voltage, current and resist-
the minus pole of the second battery. ance must always be considered in close relation.
● Plus and minus poles have the voltage of the single This relation is represented by Ohm's Law.
battery applied.
● The total capacity (Ah) is identical with the sum of
all battery capacities.
The disadvantage of a parallel connection becomes
apparent, by equalizing currents flowing between par-
allel batteries, if the batteries have different states of
charging.
Fig. 1
According to this law a voltage of 1V is required to let
1A (ampere) flow through a conductor with a resist-
ance of 1 (Ohm).
Advice
By means of this triangle the formula can be easily re-
arranged, the value you are looking form must just be
blanked off with a finger.
Voltage U = I multiplied with R
Resistance R = U divided by I
Amperage I = U divided by R
U = Voltage in Volt
I = Current in Ampere
R = Resistance in OHM
42 BOMAG 008 910 64

Electrical energy 3.7
3.7 Electrical energy
Fig. 1
In a closed electric circuit current and voltage gener-
ate energy.
If a current of 1 Ampere flows at a voltage of 1 Volt,
energy of 1 Watt is produced.
Advice
By means of this triangle the formula can be easily re-
arranged, the value you are looking form must just be
blanked off with a finger.
Energy P = I multiplied with U
Amperage I = P divided by U
Voltage U = P divided by I
U = Voltage in Volt
I = Current in Ampere
P = Power in Watt
008 910 64 BOMAG 43

3.8 Formula diagram
3.8 Formula diagram Example:

P = 150 Watt
Description:
U = 24 Volt
● Select the desired value from the inner circle.
Sought for = Current in Ampere
● Determine the formula variables in the quarter circle
● Calculate I = P : U = 150 W : 24 Volt = 6.25 Ampere
Fig. 1
Resistance, R Ohm
Voltage, U Volt
Current, I Ampere
Power, P Watt
44 BOMAG 008 910 64

Metrology 3.9
3.9 Metrology Multimeter
This tester is a multimeter and can be used to meas-
Test lamps ure e.g. current, voltage and resistance. Depending
on the design it may also be suitable for transistor and
Test lamp frequency.
Fig. 1 Multimeter
In order to avoid damage:
Fig. 1 Test lamp
●
the range selector switch must be correctly set for
the corresponding measurement.
! Caution ●
the test cable must be plugged into the correct
This type of tester must not be used for testing on socket.
electronic components. The high power con- ●
the voltage type (AC/DC) must be set.
sumption of the test lamp may destroy electronic ●
In case of direct voltage the correct polarity must be
components in the control units.
assured.
Diode test lamp ●
the measuring range should be chosen higher at
This instrument is used for simple voltage measure- the beginning of the test.
ments. The test lamp consists of two test points. The ● In order to avoid any influence on the circuitry to be
negative measuring cable is connected to ground and measured, the internal resistance of the voltage
the positive measuring cable to the corresponding tester should be as high as possible.
measuring location.
Resistance and continuity measurement with mul-
timeter
The continuity tester of the multimeter can be used to
measure whether there is a connection between 2
measuring points. The following information should be
observed when measuring resistance and continuity:
● The component to be measured must not be con-
nected to the power supply during the measure-
ment.
● At least one side of the component to be measured
must be disconnected from the circuitry, as other-
wise the measuring result may be influenced by
parallel components.
● Polarity is of no significance.
Fig. 2 Diode test lamp

If voltage is present, the corresponding light emitting
diode will light up.
008 910 64 BOMAG 45

3.9 Metrology
Voltage and voltage drop measurement with mul- Clip-on measuring instrument
timeter
The clip-on measuring instrument can be used to
measure current, voltage and resistance.
Fig. 2
● The meter is always connected parallel to consum-
er, component or power source.
● Measurement at the voltage source measures the
currently available Voltage.
● A measurement at the consumer measures the volt-
age drop at this component.
Current measurement with the multimeter
Fig. 1 Clip-on measuring instrument

●
For measuring current the individual conductor
must be fully enclosed by the measuring tongs, the
actual measurement takes place without contact.
Fig. 3
●
During the measurement the current must be able
to flow through the meter, i.e. the electric circuit
must be opened. The meter is connected in series
with the consumer.
Advice
If the electric circuit is difficult to access and the inter-
nal resistance of the consumer is known, the voltage
may also be measured at the consumer.
The current value can then be calculated with the help
of Ohm's law.
46 BOMAG 008 910 64

Diodes, relays, fuses 3.10
Magnet tester 3.10 Diodes, relays, fuses
Diodes
Fig. 1
Fig. 1 Magnet tester
A diode consists of two different semi-conductors,
The magnet tester is used to test solenoid valves and which are connected by a separating layer. The max.
magnetic coils. conducting state current must not be exceeded.
The test lamp responds to the magnetic fields of A.C- Plus-voltage on diode:
voltage, D.C.-voltage and permanent magnets. ● At 0.6 – 0.7 Volt (silicium diode) the diode becomes
●
The component to be tested does not need to be re- conductive.
moved.
Negative voltage on diode:
● The magnetic coil can also be tested under a pro-
tective cap.
● The diode does not allow current to pass through.
Fig. 2 Marking of the cathode

Diodes are used:
●
For rectifying A.C. voltage.
●
For absorbing voltage peaks (free-wheeling diode).
●
For construction of logical circuits.
008 910 64 BOMAG 47

3.10 Diodes, relays, fuses
Diode logics and free-wheeling diode Relays
Fig. 1 Relays
Relays are commonly used to realize switching proc-
esses.
A free-wheeling diode prevents induction voltage from
flowing back from the coil into the vehicle wiring sys-
tem, which would cause interference with electronic
components (control units).
With the possibility of using breaker - maker contacts
the effect of an information can be reversed.
Fig. 3 Diode circuitry

● The solenoid valve Y48 (Fig. 3) is supplied with
electric current when switch S34 is switched to po-
sition "1" or "2".
● Solenoid valve Y20 is supplied, if the switch is in po-
sition "1".
● Solenoid valve Y21 is supplied with electric current,
when switch S34 is switched to position "1" or "2".
The three diodes V02 serve as free-wheeling diodes
with the function of of eliminating voltage peaks.
Fig. 2 Relay circuitry

The windscreen wiper and washer motors can only be
operated via switches S20 and S21, when relay K32
is supplied with electric current (Fig. 2).
86 = Positive supply for coil
48 BOMAG 008 910 64

Batteries 3.11
85 = Ground supply for coil 3.11 Batteries
30 = Supply voltage
Battery – accumulator
87 = Normally open contact
87a= Normally closed contact
Fuses
Fig. 1
In vehicles batteries are used to start the engine. The
ability to start the engine depends on the charge con-
dition of the batteries.
Lead collectors or accumulators are secondary ele-
ments, i.e they can be recharged after discharging
electric current.
The basic element of a lead accumulator is the cell. It
contains the plate blocks consisting of positive and
negative plates. These plates are separated from
each other by separators.
Fig. 1 All positive plates are arranged parallel to the plus
Fuses are used to protect lines and equipment against pole, the negative plates parallel to the minus pole of
overloads and short circuit. If the fuse is overloaded the cells.
the fusible wire heats up with increasing current, until
it finally melts.
Caution
!
Fuses must not be repaired or bridged.

The melting time at 23 °C is:
● approx. 1 hour with 1.5 times the rated current
● approx. 1 minute with 2.5 times the rated current.
A 5 Amp fuse loaded with 1.5 times the rated current
(7.5 Amp) will finally melt after approx. 1.5 hours.
Yellow = 5 A
Brown = 7.5 A Fig. 2
White = 8 A All cells are filled with a conductive fluid, the electro-
Red = 16 A lyte. For a 12 Volt battery 6 cells are connected in se-
Blue = 25 A ries.
Capacity
is a synonym for the amount of current taken up and
discharged by a battery over a specified period of
time.
Rules for the handling of batteries

Even though it may be conveniently installed in the
engine compartment, it should never be used as a rest
008 910 64 BOMAG 49

3.11 Batteries
for tools. If the poles are connected e.g. by a spanner, ● Remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry and
the battery will become an electric welder. frost protected room.
As a measure to avoid short circuits you should first ● Check the open circuit voltage on the battery at reg-
disconnect the negative pole during disassembly and ular intervals (at least once every month).
reconnect the negative pole last during assembly. ● Recharge immediately if the open circuit voltage
Terminal clamps should be assembled with as little has dropped to 12.25 Volt (no rapid charging).
force as possible.
Poles and terminal clamps should always be kept i Note
clean to avoid transition resistances during starting The open circuit voltage of batteries occurs approx. 10
and the related development of heat. h after the last charging or approx. 1 h after the last
You should obviously also pay attention to secure fas- discharge.
tening of the battery in the vehicle.
Battery test in general
Safety precautions: ● Is the battery leaking? Can traces of impact, shock
● Wear goggles and face protection (acid). or compression be found in the leaking area?
● Wear suitable clothes to protect face, hands and ● Check for e.g. incorrect fastening, foreign bodies on
body (acid). the battery mounting surface and similar.
● Work and store accumulators only well ventilated
rooms. (Development of oxyhydrogen gas). Testing batteries with screw plugs
● Do not lean over the battery while it is under load, Checking the acid density:
being charged or tested. (Danger of explosion). ● The cells are filled with diluted sulphuric acid as
●
Burning cigarettes, flames or sparks can cause ex- electrolyte (approx. 25 Vol% sulphuric acid in dis-
plosion of the accumulator tilled water), also referred to as accumulator acid,
which has a density of 1.285 kg/dm3 at a tempera-
●
Keep ignition sources away from the battery.
ture of +27° Celsius. This means that one litre of
●
Always shield eyes and face towards the battery. electrolyte has a weight of 1.285 kg. As the cell is
●
Do not use battery chargers or jump leads without being discharged lead sulphate (PbSO4) will form
following the operating instructions. on both electrodes and the electrolyte will increas-
●
Keep the cell plugs closed. ingly change to water. Since water has a lower spe-
cific weight than diluted sulphuric acid the density of
●
After an accident with acid flush the skin with water
the electrolyte will also drop during the discharge
and seek medical advice.
and with a fully discharged cell and a temperature
●
Do not allow children access to batteries. of 27°C it will only be 1.18 kg/dm3.
●
When mixing battery fluid always pour acid into wa- ● With a lead cell the acid density is therefore a meas-
ter, never vice-versa. ure for the charge condition. This characteristic is
used to determine the charge condition of a lead
Battery maintenance
battery. The so-called acid tester (hydrometer) is
used for this purpose. In a battery of good condition
i Note the acid density should be the same in all cells.
Maintenance free batteries are gaining more and
Acid density at 27 °C in kg/dm3
more significance, this freedom from maintenance,
however, is only limited to the fact that no water needs
● 1.25 -1.28, open-circuit voltage approx. 12.7 Volt.
to be added. Battery is charged.
● 1.20 -1.24, open circuit voltage approx.12.4 to 12.5
If the battery is not charged and discharged over a
Volt, is 50% discharged. Charging is necessary.
longer period of time, the battery will slowly discharge
by itself.
● 1.19 and less, open circuit voltage less than 12.3
Volt. Battery is insufficiently charged. Battery needs
The accumulator may only be discharged down to a fi- to be recharged immediately.
nal discharging voltage of 10.5 Volt, as otherwise
there is a risk of sulphation, i.e. the generated lead
sulphate forms increasingly coarser crystals, which i Note
will finally not react at all or only very sluggishly during If the current consumption during charging is not 1/20
a subsequent charging process. of the nominal capacity (example 100 Ah battery:
In the worst case the accumulator can only be dis- 100Ah x 1/20 = 5 A) or full charging of the battery re-
posed of after such an exhaustive discharge. sults in a final acid density of only 1.24 kg/dm3 or less,
the battery shows normal wear by aging. The battery
The following therefore applies for longer downtimes:
was insufficient charging or exhaustive discharge.
50 BOMAG 008 910 64

Batteries 3.11
Fig. 3 Reading the acid level Fig. 4 Battery and generator tester
●
Maximum permissible tolerance between highest The battery and generator tester comes with an 8-line
and lowest measuring value of the 6 cells: 0.03 kg/ LC display with background illumination and is able to
dm3. print out test results via an (optional) integrated ther-
mal printer.
Testing batteries without screw plugs
On closed batteries the acid density cannot be meas-
ured, we therefore recommend testing with the follow- i Note
ing mobile tester: Before testing clean the poles and ensure good con-
nection between clamps and poles.
The test program calculates the text messages "good"
or "replace" on the basis of the charge condition (de-
rived from the battery voltage) and the currently avail-
able starting power of the battery. A battery with 45%
starting power may thus be rated good and another
one with 75% starting power as poor ("replace").
The starting power represents the ratio of detected
cold testing current to the entered cold testing current
of the battery.
The starting power can exceed 100%.
Charge condition with hydrometer
Fig. 5 Charge condition Green = Charge condition >65%
008 910 64 BOMAG 51

3.11 Batteries
Dark = Charge condition <65%

Light = Electrolyte level too low
! Danger
Danger of explosion!!! If the electrolyte level is too
low, the battery must no longer be charged.
52 BOMAG 008 910 64

Three-phase generator 3.12
3.12 Three-phase generator
General
The generator should be of light weight, have a high
rate of efficiency and supply all consumers in the ve-
hicle with electric current at a steady voltage already
at idling speed.
! Caution
Before removing the generator you must discon-
nect the ground cable from the minus pole of the
battery while the ignition is switched off. Do not
disconnect the generator while the engine is run-
ning, because this may cause extremely high volt-
age peaks in the vehicle wiring system ("Load
Dump"), which could possibly damage control
units, radios or other electronic equipment.
Reason: In case of an inductance electric current has
the tendency to continue flowing when it is switched
off. For this to take place, a voltage of several thou-
Fig. 7 Stator with 3 windings
sand Volt builds up (caused by the collapsing magnet-
ic field), which can be noticed by an arc appearing at
the point of damage. With direct current this can have
severe consequences, because there is no zero
crossover at which the arc could tear off.
In the generator the armature windings are located in-
side the stationary stator, whereas the exciter winding
is arranged on the internally revolving rotor (Fig. 6).
Fig. 8 3-phase current

Fig. 6 Rotor with claw poles The generator first of all produces three-phase volt-
The three stator windings (Fig. 7) are electrically offset age / three-phase current.
to each other by 120°. The excitation of the magnetic The wiring diagram (Fig. 8) shows the 3 windings in Y-
field requires direct current, which is fed to the rotor connection and the 6 associated rectifier diodes.
via two carbon brushes and slip rings.
The diodes D1, D2, D3 are also referred to as minus
diodes, because they have B- as common connection
(minus plate).
The other diodes are the plus diodes.
The rectifier diodes have the effect that the negative
half-wave is suppressed and only the positive section
008 910 64 BOMAG 53

of the wave is allowed to pass, resulting in a pulsating Voltage regulator

D.C. voltage.
Reverse current protection

The rectifier diodes also prevent discharging of the
battery via the stator windings. The current can only
flow from the generator to the battery.
Why does three-phase current need to be rectified

and how does this work?
There are a few components for which can either be
operated with alternating current or direct current, be-
cause they work independently from the current flow
direction.
This includes :
● Incandescent lamps
● Fluorescent lamps
● Glow lamps
● Electric heating elements.
There are also a few components that could be oper-
ated either with alternating current, direct current or
three-phase current, if the components were designed
accordingly. Fig. 9 Governor with diode plate and rectifier diodes
This includes : In most cases voltage regulators (Fig. 9) with carbon
●
Electric motors brushes form a compact component. The voltage reg-
●
Relays ulator is maintenance free and the wear of carbon
brushes is only so little, that they hardly ever need to
Finally, a variety of important components solely re- be replaced during the lifetime of a machine.
quire direct current. These will under no circumstanc-
es work with alternating or three-phase current. The regulator has the following function:
This includes :
●
To maintain the vehicle voltage under any operating
conditions below 14.4 V.
●
Accumulators
●
To match the regulator voltage to the temperature.
●
Control units
●
Smooth rising of generator current when switching
●
All electronics loads (convenience function to avoid jerking of the
●
Communication equipment. engine).
54 BOMAG 008 910 64

Checking the generator
First one must check whether the generator is actually
defective.
● This can be easily found out by checking whether
the charge control light in the dashboard lights up. If
the light does not go out, even at higher speeds,
there must be a defect on the generator, the regula-
tor, the wiring or the V-belt.
● When the engine is at rest, the charge control light
must light up. If not, the lamp may probably be de-
fective. Defects on generator or wiring are obviously
also possible.
The following points allow to contain faults in the volt-
age supply within certain limits.
● Cable connections on the generator OK? Fig. 10 Rotor
● V-belt OK? ●
Remove the regulator with carbon brush.
● Generator ground (engine ground) OK? ●
Contact the rotor slip ring with the tester points.
● Pre-excitation from vehicle electronics OK? ●
The resistance should be between 3 and 6 OHM.
Only if all criteria mentioned above are OK, the fault ●
The rotor coils should not have continuity to ground.
must be in the generator itself. In this case it must be
Checking the stator
replaced or the following trouble shooting procedure
must be performed.
Measuring the charge current

●
All plug-and-socket connectors must be free of cor-
rosion and intermittent contact.
●
The generator ground connection must be OK.
●
During the measurement switch on as many con-
sumers as possible.
55 Attach the clip-on ammeter around the B+
line.
56 Gradually increase the engine speed.
57 The generator current must be at least as
high as the total current of all consumers.
Checking the rotor
i Note
The rotor coils can only be measured in disassembled
state.
Fig. 11 Stator
i Note
The stator coils can only be measured in disassem-
bled state.
● Measure the resistance of all three coils.
● The coils should not have contact among each oth-
er.
008 910 64 BOMAG 55

Checking the regulator voltage with the generator ● Perform the measurement at raised engine speed.
tester ● The voltage (B+) should adjust itself at 13 to 14 Volt.
The battery and generator tester comes with an 8-line
LC display with background illumination and is able to Checking the regulator in disassembled state
print out test results via an (optional) thermal printer.
i Note
When testing the regulator one should be aware that
there are 2 different types of regulators:
● If the carbon brush is not connected to ground the
regulator is a so-called minus controlled regulator.
The exciter winding is positioned between D+ and
DF, the regulator therefore regulates the exciter
winding on the ground side. The other carbon brush
is connected with the cathodes of the exciter di-
odes, terminal D+. This leaves one further terminal,
this is DF.
D+ (vehicle wiring system)
D- (ground contact, mostly located on one of the fas-
Fig. 12 tening screws)
The generator test assesses the regulator voltage and DF (Dynamo Field)
the ripple factor of the generator voltage.
●
All plug-and-socket connectors must be free of cor-
●
The generator ground connection must be OK.
●
The battery should be in good condition – the idle
speed voltage of the battery should be at least 12.6
Volt.
●
If possible switch off all consumers.
●
Perform the measurement at raised engine speed.
Checking the regulator voltage with the multime-

ter
Fig. 14
● If the carbon brush is connected to ground the reg-
ulator is a so-called plus controlled regulator. The
exciter winding is positioned between DF and D-,
the regulator therefore regulates the exciter winding
on the plus side. The other carbon brush is then
connected with terminal DF. This leaves one further
terminal, this is D+.
The basic function of a disassembled regulator can be
easily tested with a 12V lamp and an adjustable D.C.
power supply unit (0V ... 20V).
Fig. 13
● All plug-and-socket connectors must be free of cor-
● The generator ground connection must be OK.
● The battery should be in good condition – the idle
speed voltage of the battery should be at least 12.6
Volt.
● If possible switch off all consumers.
56 BOMAG 008 910 64

Fig. 15
E.g minus controlled regulator
One connects the regulator (Fig. 15) with D+ and D- to
the power source, as shown in the illustration, and the
lamp to both carbon brushes, instead of the exciter
winding. When slowly increasing the voltage the lamp
will first become brighter, because the regulator al-
lows all lamp current (= exciter current) to flow at volt-
age values up to 14.4V. Once the regulator voltage is
reached, the regulator switches the lamp current off.
When returning the voltage back below the control
voltage, the regulator will switch the lamp back on.
With this test the major difficulty is the problem to re-
move the regulator an identify terminals D+, DF and
D-.
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
The illustrations (Fig. 16) and (Fig. 17) show two dif-
ferent regulator types.
008 910 64 BOMAG 57

3.13 Electric starter
3.13 Electric starter ● to maintain this connection.

● to switch on the starter current.
Duties of the starter:
After starting the engine:
● to accelerate the combustion engine to start speed
with lowest possible current consumption.
● to return the starter pinion to initial position.
● establish the gear connection between starter and
● to switch off the starter current.
combustion engine.
Fig. 1 Electric starter

1 Pinion
2 Roller free-wheeling
3 Steep thread
4 Guide ring
5 Spring winding
6 Armature
7 Pole shoe
8 Carbon brushes
9 Armature brake
10 Collector
11 Magnetic switch
12 Engagement lever
58 BOMAG 008 910 64

Electric starter 3.13
Magnetic switch Trouble shooting "Starter"
The magnetic switch is normally arranged directly The most frequent fault is definitely a fully discharged
above the starter. battery.
With the starter switch switched on, both the pickup In some cases oxidized electric contacts or a soiled
winding and the holding winding are energized and ground connection causing extremely high voltage
shift the iron core in axial direction. With a lever this losses in the overall starter system are the cause of
iron core pulls the starter pinion towards the engine problems.
flywheel. Frequently a jammed return mechanism is the reason
Once the gears are engaged the starter current is ap- for a starter failure.
plied to the back through a large cross-section. At the Occasionally worn contacts are found on the magnetic
same time the pickup winding is shorted via the starter return switch
current and thus switched off as a measure to reduce
the load on the energy household. Defects on the actual starter motor including pinion
and carbon brushes are very rare.
With a trouble shooting chart the faults in the starter
system can be narrowed down. The starter system
can only work when many conditions are fulfilled at
the same time.
● Immobilizer deactivated?
● Ignition switch OK?
●
Travel lever in correct position?
●
Emergency stop not actuated?
●
Battery sufficiently charged?
●
Battery poles OK?
●
Main battery fuse OK?
●
Main battery switch closed?
●
Main starter cable (terminal 30) OK?
Fig. 2 Switching position during engagement ●
Starter control cable (terminal 50) OK, voltage
drop?
●
Ground cable OK?
●
Switching of magnetic switches OK?
The sequence of these tests is generally of no signifi-
cance. It mainly depends on:
●
the experience of the specialist
●
the failure probability of the component to be tested
and the testing effort for the respective part.
Only if all criteria mentioned above are OK, the fault
must be in the starter itself. In this case it can be re-
paired or replaced.
Fig. 3 Switching position during starting

1 Ground
2 Battery
3 Starter switch
4 Pull-in winding
5 Holding winding
6 Exciter winding
7 Restoring spring
8 Driver
9 Pinion
10 Flywheel
008 910 64 BOMAG 59

3.13 Electric starter
Testing and measuring the electric starter
i Note
The highest current flows when the starter is blocked!
(Short circuit current in starter). This is the case when
the pinion is engaged and the starter has the duty to
accelerate the flywheel to starting speed.
Function test with starter installed

● Initiate the starting process and measure the volt-
age on the pickup solenoid switch (50a). At least
10.8 Volt should be applied.
● When operating the starter switch the magnetic
switch must engage in the flywheel ring gear (no-
ticeable clicking sound) and release the starting
current to the starter. On most magnetic switches
the voltage can be measured with the multimeter. If
this does not happen even though voltage is ap-
plied, replace the magnetic switch.
Function tests with disassembled starter
!Caution
Before removing the starter you must disconnect
the ground cable from the minus pole of the bat-
tery while the ignition is switched off.
● Check the wear on the carbon brushes and their
contact pressure.
● Check the collector, it must not have electrical con-
tact with the rotor shaft.
● Check the drive pinion for excessive wear.
● The return mechanism should not be tight, if neces-
sary grease amply with silicon grease (Bosch PZ 2
V3) or a comparable grease.
● Measure the resistance of the magnetic switch main
contact in disengaged condition. Maximum value
0.2 OHM.
60 BOMAG 008 910 64

Telemecanique switch 3.14
3.14 Telemecanique switch
Terminal designation
Fig. 1 Assembly of a switch

Example:
●
Normally open contact 23 located on block 2
●
Normally open contact 24 located on block 2
●
Normally closed contact 12 located on block 1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
i Note
If e.g. block 5 is not needed to design a switch, the
numbering for blocks 1,2,3,4 and 6 remains un-
changed.
Fig. 2
1 Insert the front element into the bore and open the
fastening adapter with the auxiliary switch.
2 Tighten the screw.
3 Click the auxiliary switch into place.
008 910 64 BOMAG 61

3.15 Inductive proximity switches
3.15 Inductive proximity switches

Working principle
Fig. 1
The working principle is based on the principle of the
dampened LC-oscillator. The coil of the oscillation cir-
cuit forms a high-frequency magnetic stray field.
This stray field leaks out from the active area of the
proximity switch. If metal or non-ferrous metal enters
into the response range energy is absorbed. The os-
cillator is thus dampened and the resulting change in
current consumption is evaluated.
Fig. 3
The circuit diagram (Fig. 3) shows a proximity switch
with normally open contact.
Brown = voltage supply
Blue = ground supply
Black = switching output
The initiator in this case switches the relay (K05)
Fig. 2
Proximity switches are used as breaking or making
contacts. Depending on the design the switching dis-
tances are 2 or 4 mm. The maximum amperage is 300
mA.
The LED (Fig. 2) lights up, when the initiator has de-
tected metal in its stray field.
62 BOMAG 008 910 64

Deutsch plug, series DT and DTM 3.16
3.16 Deutsch plug, series DT and DT Series
DTM
General
Plug connectors DT and DTM have a wedge to hold
the pins and sockets in their position. This wedge can
be removed and replaced, without having to cut any
leads.
Fig. 1 DT plug connection
Fig. 4 Crimp connections
Fig. 2 DT Series
Caution
!
Do not crimp more than one lead per pin or per

socket.
Sockets and pins must not be soldered to leads,
they may only be crimped (see special tools for
electrics).
When connecting sockets and plugs these must
engage with a noticeable click when both halves
interlock.
The plug connection should not be separable
(without loosening the interlock).
Fig. 3 Sectional drawing
Pulling test
This pulling test ensures that the lead is perfectly
crimped and the contact has correctly engaged in the
housing.
●
Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
nals and connections must withstand a pulling force
of 45 N without any difficulties.
008 910 64 BOMAG 63

3.16 Deutsch plug, series DT and DTM
Installing DT contacts
Fig. 4
! Caution
● Insert the contacts through the rubber grommet until Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
they click into place. nals and connections must withstand a pulling
● Insert the orange wedge in direction of arrow. force of 45 N without any difficulties.
i Note
Use the same method when assembling the socket.
Disassembling DT contacts
Fig. 5
●
Pull the orange wedge out with long nose pliers.
●
Slightly pull the lead and unlock the interlocking
hook with a screw driver.
●
Pull the contact out of the socket.
i Note
In this case the interlock disassembly tool (see special
tools for electrics) serves as an aid to remove the
wedges.
64 BOMAG 008 910 64

Deutsch plug, series DT and DTM 3.16
DTM Series
Fig. 1 DTM plug connection
Fig. 2 DTM Series
Fig. 3 Sectional drawing
008 910 64 BOMAG 65

3.16 Deutsch plug, series DT and DTM
Installing DTM contacts
Fig. 4
! Caution
●
Insert the contacts through the rubber grommet until Perform a pull test on each lead, each of the termi-
they click into place. nals and connections must withstand a pulling
●
Insert the orange wedge, until it clicks into place. force of 45 N without any difficulties.
i Note
Disassembling DTM contacts
Fig. 5
i Note
●
Pull the orange wedge (interlock) out with long nose Use the same method when assembling the socket.
pliers.
In this case the interlock disassembly tool (see special
● Slightly pull the lead and unlock the interlocking tools for electrics) serves as an aid to remove the
hook with a screw driver. wedges.
● Pull the contact out of the socket.
66 BOMAG 008 910 64

Plugs and terminals in spring clamping technology 3.17
3.17 Plugs and terminals in spring ventional copper conductors (single, multiple or fine
stranded) with or without wire and ferrule.
clamping technology
! Caution
General
The spring clamp technology is not suitable for
extra fine conductors. Extra fine conductors can
be easily pulled out of the spring clamp!
Fig. 1
Spring clamp technology (Fig. 1) for quick, vibration
resistant and maintenance-free connection of all con-
Connecting terminal for quick repairs

BOMAG part-no.: 057 565 72
Fig. 1 That's how it works

The connecting clamp clamps up to 3 or 5 stripped
fine conductors of 0.08 mm² bis 4 mm², single or mul-
tiple strand up to 2.5 mm². And this even without tools
(Fig. 2).
That's how it works

● Strip 9-10 mm of the lead.
● Open the actuating lever and insert the strand. Fig. 2 Connecting clamp
● Return the actuating lever to initial position.
! Caution
nals must withstand a pulling force of 45 N with-
out any difficulties.
008 910 64 BOMAG 67

3.17 Plugs and terminals in spring clamping technology
Series clamp
That's how it works

● Insert a screw driver into the actuating opening until
it bottoms.
●
Strip 9-10 mm of the lead and insert it into the
clamp.
● Pull out the screw driver.
!Caution
Measuring signals
On these terminal blocks the bridge slot is most suita-
ble for tapping off and measuring signals. Here you
may directly insert a 4 mm test adapter (see special
tools for electrics) for connecting a measuring lead.
This test adapter is standard in the central electrics of
heavy equipment machines.
Fig. 2 Test adapter
68 BOMAG 008 910 64

Plugs and terminals in spring clamping technology 3.17
X-COM System for universal system wiring, ever since it was intro-
duced in 1997. All the familiar series clamping func-
The X-COM-SYSTEM, a synthesis of plug connector
tions have thus become pluggable.
and series clamp, has grown up to a construction kit
X-COM plug clamp
That's how it works

●
Insert a screw driver into the actuating opening until
it bottoms.
●
Strip 9-10 mm of the lead and insert it into the plug.
●
Pull out the screw driver.
!Caution
Measuring signals
Fig. 3 X-COM plug plugged onto the series clamp
Fig. 2 X-COM plug with measuring cable

●
The most reliable measurements on the plug can be
made when using the measuring and connecting
cable with 2mm plug (see special tools for
electrics).
008 910 64 BOMAG 69

3.17 Plugs and terminals in spring clamping technology
70 BOMAG 008 910 64

4 Special tools, electrics
008 910 64 BOMAG 71

4.1 Special tools, electrics

1. Electric test case
Fig. 1
2. Multimeter
Fig. 2
3. Test prod black, with flexible insulated shaft and
button operated gripper with 4 mm bushing,
length 157 mm.

4. Test prod red, with flexible insulated shaft and
button operated gripper with 4 mm bushing,
length 157 mm.
Fig. 3
5. Test prod black, with elastic insulated shaft 4 mm
bushing, length 97.5 mm.

6. Test prod red, with elastic insulated shaft 4 mm
bushing, length 97.5 mm.
Fig. 4
72 BOMAG 008 910 64

Special tools, electrics 4.1
7. Measuring and connecting lines with 4mm plug,
high flexible design, black, length 0.5 m.

high flexible design, black, length 1 m.

high flexible design, black, length 2 m.

Fig. 5 high flexible design, red, length 0.5 m.

high flexible design, red, length 1 m.

high flexible design, red, length 2 m.

13. Measuring and connecting lines with 2 mm plug
and gold plated lamella plugs, high flexible de-
sign, black, length 300 mm.

sign, black, length 600 mm.

sign, red, length 300 mm.
Fig. 6
sign, red, length 600 mm.

17. Transition plug connector, with 4 mm plug on one
side and 2 mm socket on the other, insulated de-
sign
Fig. 7
008 910 64 BOMAG 73

18. Magnetic coil tester
Fig. 8
19. Clip-on measuring instrument
Fig. 9
20. Battery - generator tester
Fig. 10
Spring clamps (Wago or Weidmüller)
21. Cranked screwdriver (Fig. 11) to open spring
clamps (Fig. 12).
Fig. 11
74 BOMAG 008 910 64

22. Testing adapter to measure the signals from the
series spring clamps (Wago).
Fig. 12
Deutsch contacts
23. Tool to disassemble the interlocking on Deutsch
plugs (series DT and DTM).
Fig. 13
24. Crimping pliers for Deutsch contacts of series DT
and DTM, size AWG 20,16 and 12.
AWG 20 = 0.5 mm² cable cross-section
Fig. 14
25. Crimping pliers for Deutsch contacts of series
HDT, size AWG 6 and 8.
AWG 8 = 10 mm² cable cross-section
AWG 6 = 16 mm² cable cross-section
Fig. 15
008 910 64 BOMAG 75

26. Disassembly tool for Deutsch contacts of series

HDP.
AWG 20, BOMAG part-no.: 079 900 78
Fig. 16
ITT contacts
27. Installation tool for ITT crimp contacts of series
CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 17
28. Disassembly tool for ITT male contacts of series
CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 18
29. Disassembly tool for ITT female contacts of se-
ries CA-COM, contact size 15S/16S/15/16.
Fig. 19
76 BOMAG 008 910 64

Schaltbau contacts
30. Disassembly tool for Schaltbau contacts of series
M1, M2.
Fig. 20
31. Crimping pliers for Schaltbau contacts of series
M1, M2 with connecting cross-section 0.14 mm²
to 6 mm².
Fig. 21
FCI Burndy contacts
32. Disassembly tool for FCI Burndy contacts of se-
ries TRIM TRIO
Fig. 22
33. Universal pressing pliers with toggle lever trans-
mission and adjustable end pressure for Crimp-
ing roller connector 0.14 mm² to 1 mm².
Fig. 23
008 910 64 BOMAG 77

34. Precision pressing pliers for non-insulated flat

male and female connectors 0.50 mm² to 6 mm².
Fig. 24
35. Current measurement adapter for Hirschmann
plugs.
Fig. 25
36. Voltage measurement adapter for Deutsch plugs,
8-piece (2 to 12 pole).
Fig. 26
37. Current measurement adapter for Deutsch and
AMP plugs, 2 pole.
Fig. 27
78 BOMAG 008 910 64

5 Workshop Manual
008 910 64 BOMAG 79

80 BOMAG 008 910 64
5.1 Speedometer Module
008 910 64 BOMAG 81

82 BOMAG 008 910 64

Speedometer Module 5.1
008 910 64 BOMAG 83

84 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.2 Removing and installing the engine
008 910 64 BOMAG 85

DISASSEMBLY OF THE ENGINE Fig. C/1
Perform all work prior to and during disassembly and assem-

bly in accordance with the introductory chapter on Safety,
and comply with ecological and health protection rules and
regulations.
Preparatory work
1
• Place the machine horizontally on a firm surface.
• Wedge front wheels on both sides.
• Turn the battery breaker off – brakes are automatically
applied.
2
• Place a sign on the steering wheel “MACHINE BEING
REPAIRED”.
Remove the protective frame ROPS

• Remove cover plates 1 behind the seat in front of the fuel
tank, Fig. C/1.
Fig. C/2
• Install lifting loops on ROPS frame, hook up by hoist of at
least 450-kg carrying capacity.
• Unfold lid 2.
• Unscrew nuts 1 on the right and left side that attach ROPS
to the frame of the machine, Fig. C/2. 1
• Insert bolts so that they be outside the holes in the
machine frame.
• Lift the frame out of the machine.
2
Remove the cabin
Attention – disconnect electrical wiring between the cabin
and the machine, Fig. C/3.
Fig. C/3
86 BOMAG 008 910 64

Removing and installing the engine 5.2
Disassembly within the frame Fig. C/5
• Disconnect hoses from the compressor.
• Drain on the right side of the machine, Fig. C/4
24
- coolant 1
- motor oil 2
- gearbox oil 3
• By pulling ring 24, drain pressurized air from the air-tank
using the drainage valve, Fig. C/5.
• On rollers with cabin, remove floor covering and floor
plates.
• Remove engine hood.
• Remove engine suction basket bracket from the frame,
Fig. C/6.
• Remove propeller shaft from the gearbox, Fig. C/7.
Fig. C/6
Fig. C/4 Fig. C/7
3 2 1
008 910 64 BOMAG 87

• Remove steering hydraulic generator – do not disconnect Fig. C/9

hoses, Fig. C/8.
• Disconnect from the box in the frame floor, Fig. C/9.
- coolant drain hose from the engine block 1
- engine oil drain hose 2 1
- Gearbox oil drain hose 3
• Disconnect heater hoses
• Disconnect electrical wiring from :
- Gear shifting 2
- temperature sensor 3
- starter and breaker
- pressure oil switch
- alternator
- chassis
- pressure switch
• Remove exhaust piping.

Fig. C/10
• Remove air suction with the filter.
• Remove gas pedal cable with the bowden.
• Disconnect hose from fuel input and overflow pipe from
the fuel pump.
• Remove attachment of platform to the frame, and slide
platform towards the seats.
• Using fixture no. 1 remove bolts 51and nuts 68 attachment
of the front beam assembly 1 to the frame, Fig. C/10.
• Remove nuts 30, attachment of the gearbox to the frame, 51 51
Fig. C/11.
68 68
Fig. C/8 Fig. C/11
30
30
88 BOMAG 008 910 64

• Attach engine to lift hooks, place a rope underneath the • Disassembly of the engine.
gearbox, hook up using fixture no. 2, lift slowly, remove - Loosen tightening screw of the alternator, remove
from frame, and place on support no. 3. Remove the belt, then the alternator, the starter, and the fan.
suction basket and radiators.
- Remove brackets, supports and springs from the en-
• Place the engine together with the gearbox on a suitable gine.
wooden frame, and secure against tipping over.
• Remove gearbox.
Let specialized service disassemble or repair the engine
- Unscrew brackets off the gearbox, from that point on.
- disconnect radiator hoses,
- hook up the gearbox on the hoist using fixture no. 4,
Fig. C/12,
- remove lid, Fig. C/13,
- turn the propeller shaft with the flywheel by the belt
Fig. C/14, and remove eight screw connecting the
engine to the gearbox.
- For reassembly of brackets to the gearbox use torque

300 Nm (221 lb ft).
Fig. C/13
Fig. C/12 Fig. C/14

'
¹. 4 ¹. 4
008 910 64 BOMAG 89

INSTALLATION OF THE ENGINE • Install safety frame ROPS.

- Insert attachment bolts into holes of frame ROPS so
• Place the engine on a suitable support and prevent it from that the threads of the bolts don’t show on the front
tipping over. side of the holes.
• Attach gearbox to the engine, level horizontally using - Place ROPS in the frame using the hoist.
fixture no. 4. - Insert bolt in the frame, secure with nuts 1, and tighten
with torque of 700 Nm (516 ft lb), see Fig. C/2.
• Place the assembly of the engine and the gearbox on
fixture no. 3, attach radiator with the suction basket to the - Install cover plates behind the seats.
engine. - Remove lifting hooks and insert screws instead.
• Connect radiator hoses.
• Hook up the engine on the hoist using fixture no 2 and
install in the machine frame.
• Thereafter install the steering hydraulic generator, con-
nect all electrical wiring, draining assembly on the engine
and the gearbox.
• Connect control cable to the injection pump, and fuel
lines.
• Connect propeller shaft to the gearbox, hose to the com-
pressor output
• Assemble intake and exhaust manifolds.
• Install dashboard, hood, and cabin.
• Fill up the engine and gearbox with appropriate fluids.
• Install cabin, connect wires, Fig. C/3.
90 BOMAG 008 910 64

RADIATOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
• Remove front cover, hood, and grill.

• Disconnect radiator hoses and remove expansion tank.
• Remove suction basket bracket, Fig. C/15, and screws at
the bottom of the basket Fig. C/16.
Fig. C/15 Fig. C/16
008 910 64 BOMAG 91

• Remove air collector and move it towards the engine, Fig.

C/17.
• Remove two screws at the bottom of the radiator, Fig.
C/18, and two screws attaching the radiators to the frame.
• Lift the radiators using hoist.
• Assemble in reverse order, center the air collector to the
cooling fan.
Fig. C/17 Fig. C/18

92 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.3 Rear axle
008 910 64 BOMAG 93

5.3 Rear axle
REAR AXLE
TECHNICAL DATA - DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
The assembly is fixed to the machine frame and consists of two vertical cabinets connected by the bridging axle and sealing
boots.
Torque from the gearbox is transferred by means of an elbow shaft to the transmission and the differential. The main purpose
of the transmission is the transfer of power to the two sides as a function of load on both outputs. The input torque is
transferred over the bevel gearing of the OERLIKON SPIRO MATIC type, by means of a classical bevel differential to the half-
axles and then to the gears in the columnar housings. The drive-wheel hubs and the brake drums are positioned on the
grooved output shaft.
To facilitate disassembly and assembly the entire breakdown of the rear axle drive assembly is shown on Fig. D/1 and D/2
specifying individual parts. It makes up for speedy and easy identification of parts for their eventual replacement. One should
observe the tightness of all screws and nuts, particularly the specified torque.
94 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
Fig. D/1
008 910 64 BOMAG 95

5.3 Rear axle
DISASSEMBLY OF AXLE Fig. D/3
Perform preparations, disassembly and assembly according

to the introductory chapter ”Safety precautions and instruc-
tions”, keep ecological and health precautions.
PREPARATIONS

• Secure front wheels on both sides with wooden blocks.
• Switch off batteries – the machine is automatically locked.
• Place notice “MACHINE OUT OF ORDER” on the stee-
ring wheel.
AXLE DISASSEMBLY FROM THE MACHINE

Fig. D/4
• Loosen nuts on wheels 51.
• Attach suitable ties in the hooks, lift the rear of the machi-
ne so that the wheels don’t touch the ground. Support the
frame suitably with hardwood blocks, Fig. D/3.
• Disassemble tire inflation, brake hoses, air intake to the
control of differential lock, brush holders, sprinkling, whe-
els, connecting shaft, parking brake, and wiring. Place
hooks in the rear section. Remove screws connecting the
rear section with the frame Fig. D/4. Place the rear end to
a suitable work place for further work. Secure brake
drums with two nuts 51.
• Hook up the rear axle to the hoist. Remove bolts 50 and
nuts 52, Fig. D/5.
• Place the axle on fixture no. 1 vertically see Fig. D/46.
• Remove drain plug 26 and control plug, possibly also
filling plug 25 s. Drain oil into a suitable container, Fig.
D/2.
• Hook up the rear axle to the hoist.
• Remove plugs 25 from right and left housing, Fig. D/1.
Drain oil into a suitable container. Fig. D/5
• Thereafter reinsert all plugs – do not tighten.
50
52
96 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64
DISASSEMBLY OF DRIVESHAF T Remove right and left sealing boot 3, 2. Remove sealing
Rear axle
•
ring 17, and O-ring 18, Fig. D/7.
• Rear axle to be placed horizontaly. • Turn axle bridge with the differential up.
• Remove all bolts 28 connecting left and right 2, 3 sealing
boot with the left housing 1 and the right housing 2, Fig.
D/7.
• Screw two press-out bolts M12 into M12 holes, and by
gradual tightening separate axle bridge from sealing
boots and half-axles including pinions 7 from the left and
right housings, Fig. D/7. Remove disassembled compo-
nents to a suitable place for further work, using lift. Drive
housings 1, 2 to be placed horizontally on a suitable
support with flange 13 down.
• Watch for leaking oil during disassembly.
• Remove the assembled half-axle 6, 5. From the center of
the axle remove pinions 7 with the inner snap ring 23
using proper spanner (or press out), remove washer 8
and snap ring 19. Remove inner ring of the bearing 23,
Fig. D/7.
Note – should the half-axles and pinions be used later
BOMAG
again, it is advisable to mark them so that they
could be installed in their original positions.
5.3
97
5.3 Rear axle
• Unscrew bolts 29, 30. Thread three press-out bolts M 16

and by gradual tightening remove gearbox from the cen-
ter bridge opening 1, Fig. D/7.
Note – watch for leaking oil residuals from the axle during
disassembly.
Fig. D/7
98 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
DISASSEMBLY OF DRIVE HOUSING Fig. D/10
• Remove two nuts 51 from brake drum 11. Remove brake

drum from flange bolts, if necessary use press-out bolts 34
in the holes of the drum. Remove safety washers 35, Fig.
D/8.
• Remove nut 34 using fixture no. 3 Fig. D/9.
• Remove washer 35, unscrew the other nut 34 and spacer
16, Fig. D/10. 35
• Slide flange 8 from the grooved shaft 4 using proper

spanner, Fig. D/11. Heat flange to 320 . 34
• Unscrew bolts 47 and remove brake assembly 10, Fig.
D/12.
Fig. D/8 Fig. D/11
4
51
35
51
8
11
Fig. D/9 Fig. D/12
10
¹. 3
47
34
008 910 64 BOMAG 99

5.3 Rear axle
• Insert press-out bolts M 16 into 2 holes M 16, and by their Fig. D/14
gradual tightening remove cover 12, Fig. D/13.
• Remove sealing ring 33 from the cover, washers 20, 21,
ring 19, and O-ring 32, Fig. D/14.
• Turn the housing using hoist by 180 degrees (cover 13
up), from the opposite side do 1-5. Watch for leaking
residual oil.
• Remove bolts 44, 45. Insert two press-out bolts M 16 into
holes M 16 and by gradual tightening remove cover 13
Fig. D/15. Insert hooks into holes M16 after press-out
bolts have been removed, and using a suitable handling
device place it on the working bench. While replacing
bearing 29, press out or knock out the outer ring of the
bearing from cover 13 using a bronze rod.
• On the shaft 4 anscrew fixture no. 4, hook and remove
assembly using hoist from the housing, Fig. D/16.
• Unscrew bolts 46 and press out gear 6 and inside rings of
bearing 29. For replacement of the other bearing 29,
knock out from the housing assembly using a bronze rod
the outer ring. Remove cover 17 with seal 18, Fig. D/1.
Fig. D/15
44
13
45
Fig. D/13 Fig. D/16
12 ¹. 4
100 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
• Remove safety rings 39, by knocking with a bronze rod, CLEANING AND INSPECTING PARTS
remove pins 7, O-rings 31, Fig. D/17.
• Slide both idler gears 5 from the housing. One through Cleaning
the rectangular opening in the housing, the other through For perfect cleaning of parts use suitable dissolving fluid
the large opening for the cover 13. bath. The bearings must be dipped in several times and the
• Remove entire bearing 28 including rings 37 and spacer cones or cylinders must be forcefully turned. Completely
23, Fig. D/17. clean bearings should be dried by forced air. Keep on turning
the bearings in hand to speed up drying.
• Unscrew bolts 43. Screw in holes M8 press-out screws M8
and by gradual tightening remove cover of bearing 14.
Remove bearing 27 Fig. D/1. Inspection of individual parts
• Should the main components (gears, pinions, splined • Check visually all cones, rollers, cages, and rings of
shaft, and flange) be used further, mark the parts suitably bearings for pitting, breaks, or fissures. If any damage
to be able to install them in original positions later. should appear, it is necessary to replace the bearing. It is
not recommended to replace only the internal or external
rings of cone bearings.
• After checking submerge the bearing in oil and wrap in
paper thereafter to keep it clean until usage.
• If no method of flaw detection can be applied, it is neces-
sary to inspect the teeth, polished surfaces, fissures, and
overall wear. Small dents may be removed by polishing.
In case of more severe damage (fissures, tears in the
cemented surface, etc.) it is necessary to replace the unit.
• On shafts, check for eccentricity, straightness of grooves
and play in grooves in the matching section (half-axle,
carriers, etc.)
• The visual control includes the appearance of dents or
frays on meshing surfaces and openings for the bearings.
Further, it is necessary to check carefully for tears and
deformations. The hub and housing of the differential
must be checked for fundamental deviations in geometry,
like axial alignment, eccentricity, etc.
• If the check reveals tears in the brake drum, any deep
damage and wear (grooves, etc.) that cannot be rewor-
ked on the lathe to the maximum value of 402,5 millime-
ters (15,8 in), the drum must be replaced.
• If the least damage is discovered, the part must be repla-
ced.
Fig. D/17
008 910 64 BOMAG 101

5.3 Rear axle
AXLE ASSEMBLY Fig. D/18
DRIVE HOUSING ASSEMBLY
• Housing 1, 2 to be cleaned of mechanical dirt, blown out

by compressed air, and placed horizontally on a firm
surface (support), Fig. D/18.
• Screw two plugs 33 in the holes of the housing, Fig. D/19.
• Place safety rings 37 and bearing 28 into holes of idler
gear 5. Turn the wheel and insert ring 23 and the other
bearing 28 from the opposite side into the opening, Fig.
D/17.
• Turn the housing by 90 degrees with the large opening
down.
• Press outer ring of bearing 29 in the large hub, Fig. D/20.
Fig. D/19
33
33
Fig. D/20
29
102 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
• Press sealing ring 33 in cover 12, Fig. D/21. Fig. D/22
• Apply LOCTITE 574 on faces of cover 12 and the hub. In
steps, place cover 12 Fig. D/21. The brake assembly 10
on the hub and fasten with bolts 47, Fig. D/22. Apply
LOCTITE 577 on threads. 10
• Turn housing by 90 degrees, Fig. D/18.

• Slide idler gear assembly into the housing, one the rec-
tangular opening Fig. D/23, the other through the ope-
47
ning for cover 13, Fig. D/24.
• Turn the housing by 90 degrees, the large opening up.
Fig. D/23
10
Fig. D/21 Fig. D/24
33
12
10
008 910 64 BOMAG 103

5.3 Rear axle
• Center holes in bearings 28 and idler gears 5 against Fig. D/26

openings in the housing Fig. D/25.
• Slide O-rings 31 and snap ring 38 on the pins of inserted
wheels 7, and press in pins 7, Fig. D/26.
• Heat gear 6 to 150 C - 180 C (302-356 F) and set on 31 38
grooved shaft 8. After cooling off, bolt the assembly
together using bolts 46 and correct torque – see table.
Heat inner rings of bearings 29 to 100 C (212 F) and set
on shaft from both sides 8, Fig. D/27.
• On the shaft 4 anscrew fixture no. 4, and set the entire 7
assembly using hoist in the inner ring of bearing 29 in the 7
cover 12, Fig. D/28.
Fig. D/27
29
Fig. D/25 Fig. D/28
¹. 4
104 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
• Smear the touching surface of cover 13 and the opening Finding the rate of prestress:
in the housing with LOCTITE. Screw cable hook (screw M - measure “X” - size of step on 2 as in Fig. D/31.
12) in force-off openings in cover 13 and fit in place –
selected position ”a” as in Fig. D/29. Fix screws 44, 45 by - measure “Y” - distance of inner bearing ring 29 from cover
LOCTITE. face 13 as in Fig. D/32.
• Press in the inner ring of the other bearing 29 in cover 13, Calculate rate of prestress of bearings “P”:
Fig. D/30. P=Y–x
• Following the installation of cover 13 adjust prestress of Finding the gauge of washers ”Z”
bearings 29 by inserting washers 20, 21. The prestress of Z = P + 0,4
bearings is given by 0,4 0,6 mm (0,016 - 0,024 in).
Fig. D/29 Fig. D/31
13
a
X
12
Fig. D/30 Fig. D/32
29
13 13
Y
29
008 910 64 BOMAG 105

5.3 Rear axle
• Smear touching areas of both covers 12 and 13 with Fig. D/34

LOCTITE. Prepare and insert limiting washers 20 and 21
as calculated for prestress in the opening of cover 13 Fig.
D/33. Place cover 12 to cover 13. Set brake assembly 10
on cover 12 and tighten bolts 47. Smear thread with
LOCTITE, Fig. D/34.
• Place sealing O-ring 32 and chrome plated ring 19 on
shaft 4 Fig. D/35.
• Insert bolts 49 in hubs 8. Slide fixture no.5 on the shank of
bolts. Apply nuts 51 and fix bolt to the hub flange using
fixture. Preheat hub in an electric oven to 200 – 250 C 47
(392-482 F). In turn, close the heads of bolts on two sides
by welding, Fig. D/36.
10
In Czech Republic use electrode. OK 67.45 – made by ESAB

Žamberk.
Marking of electrodes to the following standards
SN EN 1600 (05 51 00) OK 67.45
DIN 8556 E 18 8 Mn B 20+
AWS A/SFA 5.4 – 92 E 307 – 15
Fig. D/35
EN 1600 (European standard) E 18 8 Mn B 42
19
Fig. D/33 Fig. D/36
20
21
49
13
12 ¹. 5
106 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
• Heat flange 8 to 200÷250 °C (392÷482 °F) and slide on Fig. D/38
grooved shaft 4, Fig. D/37.
• Slide spacing ring 18 on shaft 4, use nut 34 and tighten.
Fig. D/38.
34
• Secure with washer 35. Slide on the other washer 35,
screw and tighten the other nut 34, and secure using tab
washer 35, Fig. D/39.
• Fix brake drum 11 on bolts in flange, and tighten with 2
nuts 51, Fig. D/40. 16
Fig. D/39
34
35
34
Fig. D/37 Fig. D/40
8
51
11
51
008 910 64 BOMAG 107

5.3 Rear axle
Brake adjustment on both housings:

• Turn brake drum with adjustment hole downwards to the
adjustment wheel 2, Fig. D/41.
• Turn adjustment wheel 2 until brake shoes touch brake
drum – the brake drum cannot be turned.
• Turn adjustment wheel back until brake shoes become
loose – the brake drum can be turned freely, without
audible friction of the drum on the shoes.
Fig. D/41
108 BOMAG 008 910 64

Rear axle 5.3
ASSEMBLING AXLE TO THE MACHINE
• Respect the rules of work safety.

• Hook rear axle on he lift, attach plates to machined areas
of the frame and bolt to the frame with 16 screws 50 with
washers 59, 57 and nut 52. Tighten with torque as in table,
Fig. D/51.
• Tighten bolts 27 with torque of table, connecting the left
sealing boot 2 to axle bridge 1 Fig. D/42.
Fig. D/51
50
52
008 910 64 BOMAG 109

5.3 Rear axle
110 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.4 Front axle
008 910 64 BOMAG 111

5.4 Front axle
E - FRONT AXLE
1. Technical data
1.1. Description
1.2. Specifications
1.3. Torque values
1.4. Lubricants and glues
2. Defects and remedies

2.1. Inspection of installation of four front wheels
3. Axle disassembly
3.1. Preparatory work
3.2. Disassembly of axle from the equipment
3.3. Disassembly of guiding pipe of the front axle
3.4. Disassembly of fork
3.5. Cleaning and inspection of parts
4. Installation of front axle

4.1. Installation of guiding pipe and fork
4.2. Assembly of wheel hubs and shaft
4.3. Assembly of fork and shaft assembly with wheel hubs
4.4. Assembly of axle to the machine
5. Fixtures
1. TECHNICAL DATA
1.1. DESCRIPTION
The front axle assembly is fixed to the housing frame of the machine. It consists of two movable arms with a hydraulic cylinder.
For easier disassembly and assembly refer to Fig. E/1, E/2 to see the entire exploded view of the front axle with specifications
of each part for easier orientation when replacements are necessary.
Watch particularly for proper tightening of all screws and nuts and refer to table of applicable torque.
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
axial (vertical) lift mm (in) 200 (7,84)

pitch diameter of disc bolts on wheels mm (in) 275 0,2 (10,83) (0,008)
weight of front axle including tires kg (lb) 1156 (2549)
112 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
1.3. TORQUE VALUES
Connection Position Thread Nm (lb ft)
Flange 9+shaft 8 KM nut 38 M60x2 500 (369)

Scraper 32+shaft 8 Bolt 64 M10 25 (18,5)
Pin16+shaft 8 Bolt 31 M12 45 (33)
Pin 16+washer 23 Bolt 65 M12 45 (33)
Cover 10+guiding pipe 2 Bolt 62 M10 25 (18,5)
Cover 12+Guiding pipe 2 Bolt 61 M10 25 (18,5)
Cover 11+guiding pipe 2 Bolt 63 M10 25 (18,5)
Disc wheel+flange 9 Disc nut 73 M20x1,5 330 350 (243 258)
other connections see appendix no.1
1.4. LUBRICANTS AND GLUES
Oil fill:
For hydraulic cylinders of the front axle equalization system, the hydraulic oil of series ISO 6743/4 HM or HV with kinetic
viscosity of 46 mm2/s at 40 C (104 F) /ISO VG 46/ is to be used.
This corresponds to DIN 51524 part 2 HLP, or DIN 51524 part 3 HVLP, eventually CETOP RP 91 H.
Type of oil Quantity l (gal US)
H M or HV 46 6 (1,6)
Lubricating grease
Synthetic grease containing lithium. of consistence to NLGL – 2* - see table.
BENZINA MOBIL ESSO SHELL CASTROL

P-ML-A2 Mobilgrease MP Multi-Purpouse Retinax A Castrolease LM
Mobilgrease Special Grease H Alvania Spherol
Mobilplex EP-1 Grease No.3 Grease RBB2
* - NLGI 2 - National Lubricating Grease Institute; part 2
Glue for fixing bolts and nuts LOCTITE 577

Aldurit
Sealing compound for touching faces of parts Epple 39
008 910 64 BOMAG 113

5.4 Front axle
2. DEFECTS AND REMEDIES
Defect Cause Remedy
Oil leak defective seal replace

damaged chrome on the fork replace (or repair)
Axle noisy mechanical damage to part replace
free play in conical bearings adjust see. 2.1
Free play in steering (mounting of conical pins of the steering rod) conical holes pressed out repair bushing
2.1. INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION Fig. E/1

OF FOUR FRONT WHEELS
• Free play of conical bearings must be checked.

Eventually, any noticeable must be adjusted
immediately. First inspection after 100 Mh and
then every 500 Mh.
Instructions for set-up:

• Remove complete wheel with disc, by loosening
nuts 73, washers 39, outer nut 38. Tighten n. 13
up the inner nut using proper wrench with exten-
sion. While doing this, position bearings 37 and
41 by tapping the hub of the wheel Fig. E/2.
• The front wheel bearings are properly adjusted,
when there is no free play in conical bearings,
and the wheels may be turned easily without
resistance.
114 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
3. AXLE DISASSEMBLY
Preparatory work, disassembly and assembly must be done in line with the Safety Precautions and Instructions chapter.
Observe ecological and health regulations.
3.1. PREPARATORY WORK
• Place the machine horizontally on a firm and flat surface.

• Place wooden block under rear wheels on both sides.
• Switch off batteries – the machine’s brake has been set automatically.
• Place the sign ”THE EQUIPMENT IS OUT OF ORDER” on he steering wheel.
Fig. E/2
008 910 64 BOMAG 115

5.4 Front axle
3.2. DISASSEMBLY OF AXLE FROM THE Fig. E/4

EQUIPMENT
• Remove nuts 73, Fig. E/2.

• Insert proper ties in the lifting hooks, hoist the front end 33
high enough so that the front wheels are off the ground,
see Fig. E/3.
• Remove cover off the frame above the front wheels.
• Remove connecting pipe 33 and the connectors, plug up
the hole, Fig. E/4.
• Further, remove tires inflation attachment, brush holders,
wheels, sprinkling equipment, steering (connecting rod),
and electrical cables.
• Unscrew plug 52, attach hook No.1, Fig. E/5.
Fig. E/5
52
Fig. E/3 Fig. E/6
72
116 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
• Remove nuts 72 Fig. E/6 and, bolts 66, Fig. E/7. 3.3. DISASSEMBLY OF GUIDING PIPE OF THE
• If it isn’t possible to remove the axle from the frame, press- FRONT AXLE
out bolts must be used in the holes of guiding pipe 2
flange. • Remove cover 11 on the face of the guiding pipe 2. Knock
• Slide the axle from the frame forward, disconnect the out gently cover 11 and remove by prying it out. Remove
hoist and remove ropes from frame holes. Hook up again O-ring, and cover 12 on the top face of fork 1, Fig. E/8.
and deposit on fixture No.2. Unscrew hook. Turn the • Using hoist remove guiding pipe 2.
guiding pipe 2 through opening for the connecting pipe,
and drain oil into a suitable container.
Note: Watch for leaking residual oil. Protect the chrome-
plated part of fork 1 by a suitable cover (by a split
rubber hose, for instance) against damage, after the
removal of the guiding pipe.
• Remove cover 10 on the bottom face of the guiding pipe

2. Remove washer 18, scraper ring 45 from the cover 11,
packing 44 from ring 18, and two O-rings 46 and 47
Remove bolt 60 (fixing the top bushing) Fig. E/1.
• Remove bushing 26 with a spanner, Fig. E/9.
Fig. E/7
66
Fig. E/8 Fig. E/9
2 11 26
12
008 910 64 BOMAG 117

5.4 Front axle
3.4. DISASSEMBLY OF FORK Fig. E/10
• Remove shim 23. Remove extension 24 with nipple 84,

23
Fig. E/10.
• Attach hook No. 3 in the center hole of the shaft (thread
M16x1,5). Attach to hoist, Fig. E/11.
• Remove bolts from the yokes of the fork 1. By a gentle
knock loosen the yokes Slide bushings off pins 4, Fig.
E/12.
24
• Place on bench. 84
• Remove hook No.3.
• Release lock washer 39 (MB 12), gradually remove nuts
38.
Fig. E/11
¹. 3
Fig. E/12
118 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
• Remove hub, or a suitable lever (screwdriver) by the lower Fig. E/13
edge of the hub 9 with spanner, Fig. E/13.
• Remove washer 28 and sealing ring 42 from the hub, in 9
case of replacing bearings, also the front bearing 41 and
the outer ring of the rear bearing 37. Unscrew nipple 82
Fig E/14.
Note: Should the bearing be replaced, the complete bea-

ring must be replaced.
• Turn the fork and remove hub 9 from the opposite side.
• Remove pins 16 from shaft 8. Using spanner attached to
the face of the pin 16 by two screws M12, remove pins
from shaft 8. Should bearings 37 be replaced from shaft
8 remove inner rings of bearing 37 Fig. E/2.
Fig. E/14
008 910 64 BOMAG 119

5.4 Front axle
3.5. CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF PARTS CHECKING EACH PART

Bearings
Cleaning of parts
Check visually all cones, cages, and rings for pitting, breaks
For complete cleaning use adequate solvent fluid bath. The in material, or dents. Should there be any damage present,
bearings must be taken out of the bath repeatedly, and the the bearing has to be replaced. It is not allowed to replace
cones or rollers must be turned under pressure. Perfectly only the inner or outer rings of conical bearings.
clean bearings to be dried out with dry compressed air, while Following the inspection dip the bearing in oil and wrap in
turning the bearings by hand to accelerate the process. paper to keep it clean until future use.
Shafts
Check for eccentricity, straight grooves, and general wear.
Castings, bushings
Visual control includes checking for dents, flares on functio-
nal surfaces and holes for the bearings. Further, check
carefully for the appearance of fissures and deformations.
Piston rod (fork 1), guiding pipe 2

Check for eccentricity, straightness, dents on functional sur-
faces, and chrome on the fork. In case of non-repairable
damage, replace the part. Small dents may be removed by
filing.
Rubber seals, O-rings, packing

Should there be any damage observed, replace.
120 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
4. INSTALLATION OF FRONT AXLE Fig. E/15
4.1. INSTALLATION OF GUIDING PIPE AND FORK

¹. 2
• Set the guiding pipe in fixture no.2 or on a bench. Press
bushing 26 into the guiding pipe 2, Fig. E/15 using fixture
no. 4 E/16.
NOTE ! Save bushings by the usable surface, only

one half of the pieces is affected, Fig. E/15 Fix
the inner bushing by bolt 60, Fig. E/16.
2
• Turn the guiding pipe 2 with bushings in fixture no. 2 to

vertical, secure and clean the inside by air. 26
• Grind taper on the fork with a whetstone.
• Press ring 18 with O-rings 46, sealing set ”Merkel” 44, and
scraper ring into cover 10, Fig. E/17.
Fig. E/16
60
¹. 2
¹. 4
Fig. E/17
10 18
44
45
46
008 910 64 BOMAG 121

5.4 Front axle
• Install cover 10 with seals on fork 1 into holes for bolts in Fig. E/18
cover 10, attach fixture no. 5, slide into guiding pipe 2
using hoist and fixture no. 6 inserted in hooks of fork 1, 10 ¹.15
Fig. E/18 until cover 10 sits on the face of the guiding pipe
2. Pack cover 10 with EPPLE glue.
1
• Attach cover 10 to guiding pipe 2. Slide fork 1 out and
remove fixture no. 5.
• Tilt the assembled guiding pipe with the fork horizontally
2
• Screw in the opening for the oil pipeline the plug against
dust entry.
• Screw cover 12 to the face of the fork. Screw cover 11 to
the guiding pipe including ring 47 and apply glue EPPLE
Fig. E/19.
• Screw hook no.1 in the cover 11. Remove the guiding pipe
with the fork from the fixture and place on the workbench.
Fig. E/19
11
12
122 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
4.2. ASSEMBLY OF WHEEL HUBS AND SHAFT Fig. E/21
• Insert bolts 67 in hubs 9. Slide fixture no.7 on the shank

of the bolt. Screw nuts 73 and tighten bolt to the hub
flange using fixture. Preheat hub in the electric oven to
200 - 250 C. Weld in turn the bolt heads from both sides,
Fig. E/20.
Used electrode to SN EN 1600 (05 51 00) - made by
ESAB Žamberk OK 67.45 – valid for the Czech Repub-
lic. 8
The corresponding electrodes according to

DIN 8556 E 18 8 Mn B 20+ 16
AWS A/SFA 5.4 – 92 E 307 – 15
EN 1600 (European standard) E 18 8 Mn B 42
• Clamp shaft 8 in a vice (protect ground surface), or in

fixture no. 8, install brush holders 32.
• Press pins 16 to shaft 8, screw, fix bolts with ALDURIT and
degrease threads, Fig. E/21.
Fig. E/22
• Press outer rings of the conical bearing 41 into hub 9
using fixture no.9, ring 29, and sealing ring 42 using
fixture no.10. Turn hub 9 and repeat the preceding opera-
tion. Screw on nipple 82. Fig. E/22.
• Place shaft 8 on the workbench in fixture no.8, preheat
inner bearing ring 37 (to a maximum of 100 C), and press
on the shaft – hit with fixture no. 11 to end. Place hub 9 on
shaft 8, fill space between bearings with grease, and
press in the inner ring of the second bearing 41 using
fixture no. 11 Fig. E/23.
Fig. E/20 Fig. E/23
¹. 7 67
008 910 64 BOMAG 123

5.4 Front axle
• Place tapered plate no. 12 on sealing ring 42, insert shim Fig. E/24
28, Fig. E/24.
• Screw on first nut 38 using fixture no. 13, use torque
according to table. Knock off the bearing using fixture
no.14, retighten the nut with torque, test pre-stress of 28
bearings by turning hub 9 (it may not turn freely). Insert
two safety washers 39 and the second nut 38, tighten Fig. ¹.12
E/25. Secure nuts with washers.
• Screw hook no.3 in the center hole of shaft 8 Fig. E/26,
and place the assembly on the workbench with the hub
down.
• Heat inner ring of bearing 37 (to a maximum of 100 °C) and
place on the shaft – press to dead stop using fixture no.11
Fig. E/23.
• Place hub 9 on shaft 8, fill in the space between the
bearings with grease, and press in the inner ring of
bearing 41 Fig. E/22.
• Press tapered plate no. 12 on the sealing ring 42, insert
shim 28, Fig. E/24.
• Install nuts 38 and washers 39 with limited pre-stress of
bearings 37 and 41 as per preceding operation. Fig. E/25
38
38
39
Fig. E/26
¹. 3
124 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
4.3. ASSEMBLY OF FORK AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY Fig. E/27
WITH WHEEL HUBS
1 1B
• Remove yokes 1A from the fork, remove bushings 1B and
smear with grease, Fig. E/27.
• Insert bushings on pins 18, Fig. E/28. 1A
1B
• Assemble axle axis (pos. 8+9), hang by hook no.3, Fig.
E/26 on hoist.
• Insert shaft axle on forks into yokes, Fig. E/29.
1A
Fig. E/28
Fig. E/29
008 910 64 BOMAG 125

5.4 Front axle
• Assemble yokes, Fig. E/30. Fig. E/30

• Screw on extensions 24 and nipple 84. Insert shim 23,
Fig. E/31.
• Weld end stops pos. 10 on both sides using fixture no.15.
Set the fixture on hub bolts 9 and support the other end
(end stop) against piston rod of fork 1 (protect the surface
of the piston rod against damage), Fig. E/32. The end
stop limits the spacing between the tire and the piston rod
to 13 mm when the axle is off vertical.
Fig. E/31
23
24
84
Fig. E/32
¹.15
10
126 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
4.4. ASSEMBLY OF AXLE TO THE MACHINE
• Hoist the axle to the frame of the machine, hook up a

cable, and attach to hook no.1. Lift the axle to the frame
and attach. Remove the hook.
• Connect both guiding pipes with pipe 33 Fig. E/3.
• Fill both guiding pipes with oil, see table in 1.3. Screw on
plug 52. Following wheel alignment (see chapter ”G”),
install complete wheels to flanges. Further install tire
inflation assembly, sprinkler, and electrical cables.
008 910 64 BOMAG 127

5.4 Front axle
5. FIXTURES No.4 Installation (64-373-469) - for pressing bushings 26

into guiding pipe 2
No.1 Hook (92-644-0195) for removal of axle from the ma-

chine and thread M 24x1,5 in cover 11
No.5 Installation (64-374-0008) – for installation of cover 10

into holes for screws
No.2 Assembly support (64 373-0470) for placing guiding

pipe 2
No.6 Handling (65-374-0009) – for installation of fork 1 to

guiding pipe 2
No.3 Hook (65-374-0010) for removal of assembly shaft 8 +

hub 9, thread M16x1,5 No.7 Welding (54-373-0478) – bushing for placing bolts
128 BOMAG 008 910 64

Front axle 5.4
No.8 Installation (64-373-0473) – support for shaft 8 No.11 Pressing (92-631-0006) - ∅ 70/63-200 pipe inner rings
of bearings 37,41
No.9 Pressing (92-631-0006) – ∅ 110/91-130 pipe inner

rings of bearings 37, 41
No.12 Installation (64-374-0004) – tapered plate for sealing

ring 42 to install ring 28
No.10 Pressing (92-631-0117) - ∅ 120x100x13 pressing tool

for sealing ring 42, 43
008 910 64 BOMAG 129

5.4 Front axle
No.13 Installation (64-373-092) – extension for nut KM 12 No.14 Pipe (92-631-0006) – Pipe ∅ 81/89-140 for knocking
pos.38 off bearings 37,41
No.15 Welding (64-373-0471) – for placing end stops on the

fork 1
130 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.5 Drive shaft
008 910 64 BOMAG 131

5.5 Drive shaft
F - FLEXIBLE SHAFT
1. Specifications - description
1.1. Description
1.2. Specifications
1.3. Tightening torque
2. Possible defects and remedies
3. Disassembly and re-assembly

1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. DESCRIPTION
The flexible shaft serves the purpose of transmitting torque to the gearbox to drive the rear axle (differential).
It consists of two separate parts inserted in each other, and moving in the groves of the axial axis.
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
Max. transmitted torque Nm (lb ft) 4500 (3320)

–1
Revolutions 1.min (RpM) 2200
Weight of the shaft kg (lb) 25 (55)
1.3. TORQUE
Tightening torque values are listed in appended table.
1.4. GREASE
Synthetic grease with Lithium added of prescribed consistence NLGI -2* , see table.

132 BOMAG 008 910 64

Drive shaft 5.5
2. POSSIBLE DEFECTS AND REMEDIES
DEFECT CAUSE REMEDY
Shaft is vibrating Mechanical damage of the bearing Replace shaft
3. DISASSEMBLY AND RE-ASSEMBLY
Do all preparatory work, disassembly, and re-assembly with Chapter on safety in mind. Comply with environmental and health
regulations.
3.1. PREPARATORY WORK
• Place the roller horizontally on a firm surface.

• Switch off battery breaker – the machine brakes automatically.
• Place notice ”ROLLER IS BEEING REPAIRED” on the steering wheel.
• Remove rubber mat and insulation off the floor.
• Remove two floor covers.
• Hold the flexible shaft by suitable ties (ropes) in the hoist, or support it.
• Remove bolts on the gearbox side and on the rear axle drive side, Fig. F/1, F/2. Remove the shaft and place it outside.
• Install new shaft in reverse sequence – use new safety nuts.
Fig. F/1 Fig. F/2
008 910 64 BOMAG 133

5.5 Drive shaft
134 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.6 Steering
008 910 64 BOMAG 135

5.6 Steering
G - STEERING
1. Specifications - description
1.1. Description
1.2. Technical data
2. Possible defects and remedies
3. Disassembly and re-assembly

3.2. Geared steering hydraulic generator
3.3. Power steering
3.4. Disassembly of linear hydraulic motor
3.5. Removal of power steering tank
3.6. Removal and installation of the lever assembly
4. Adjustment of toe-in
5. Fixtures
1. SPECIFICATIONS - DESCRIPTION
1.1. DESCRIPTION
The roller is steered mechanically and hydraulically. The geared hydraulic generator uses hydraulic oil from the oil tank with
filter, and pushes it to the steering assembly. By turning the steering wheel, the fluid stream is separated in the power steering
assembly, and enters through hoses into the linear hydraulic motor.
The front axle is steered by the linear motion of the hydraulic motor piston, the steering lever, and rods. The surplus fluid is
returned to the oil tank. The roller uses dual steering consisting of dual elements in the steering loop, that is, doubled up
power steering assembly and steering wheels.
1.2. TECHNICAL DATA
Safety pressure in power steering MPa (PSI) 12 (1740)

Geared hydraulic generator 2-Q10R.54600-00
Unidirectional, left-turning hydraulic generator (when looking to the driveshaft) changes mechanical energy to pressure. A
pair of tooth gears is mounted in the hydraulic generator on sliding bearings, with an automatic equalization of axial free play.
The pin of the driving wheel is connected to the mechanical drive.
Seals are of rubber and plastics. It is connected to the CLARK gearbox through a flange.
Volume cm3 /ot (cu.in/rev) 10 (0,61)

Nominal pressure MPa (PSI) 20 (2900)
136 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
Power steering LAGC 200LSD 102
The power steering assembly contains various valves like safety, reversing, limiting, shock, and suction valves.
In the neutral position of the steering wheel
- the connection between the pump and the tank is open
- and no force acts on the wheel
Shocks on the wheel during travel are compensated by the unidirectional reversible valve and the shock-absorbing valve.
The motion of the wheel is transferred through the column with a cone for the wheel and a groove leading to the power steering
assembly.

Maximum input fluid volume dm3 .min-1 (gal US/min) 50 (13,2)
Through-flow volume cm3/ot (cu in/rev) 200 (12)
Weight of power steering assembly kg (lb) 5,9 (13)
Load on the steering column

Maximum bending moment Nm (lb ft) 200 (147)
Maximum axial force A 1000
Maximum turning moment on the wheel Nm (lb ft) 160 (118)
Inspection
• Check smooth operation of steering
• Check after each 500 hours of operation:
- the tightness of steering assembly connections and hoses, sealing faces of the lid and screws on the lid, contacts on
the column
- safety locking screws on the lid
- steering, while running without power steering, when the source of pressure has failed
Note:
Intrusion into power steering is not allowed. If defective, call service!
Operation in emergency mode is not allowed for extended periods.
008 910 64 BOMAG 137

5.6 Steering
Linear hydraulic motor hv 80/40/200

Hydraulic linear cylinder transforms pressure to mechanical work in the cylinder with a linear motion.
Linear hydraulic motor consists of a cylinder and a piston, see Fig. G/12. Piston rings and collars provide sealing of surface
inside the cylinder. The motor doesn’t require any special maintenance or operation, only lubrication of pins at periods
specified in the lubrication schedule.
When replacing seals, cleanliness of all parts is important. Observe ecological rules, should there be leaks of oil, described
in chapter ”Safety Regulations”, section on repairs.
Technical data
Type HV 80/40/200
Max. operational pressure (max. time 0,1 s) MPa (PSI) 20 (2900)
Piston speed:
Minimal m.s-1 (feet/sec) 0,01 (0,033)
-1
Maximal m.s (feet/sec) 0,5 (1,64)
Pushing force N (lb) 75600 (16994)
Pulling force N (lb) 55493 (12234)
Lift mm (in) 200 (7,87)
Weight kg (lb) 14,7 (32,4)
Tightening torque
Connection piston rod 2, piston 3 Connection cylinder, lid nuts 1
Thread M 30x2 M 85x2
Torque Nm (lb ft) 270 (199) 370 (273)
Priority valve
By including the valve in the hydraulic loop, energy saving is achieved. The valve operates as a three-way relieve valve that
rectifies oil stream to the tank without any loss, when both steering wheels are idle. It operates independently of pressure in
steering.
The loop includes also a logic valve, which opens the hydraulic loop following a signal from power steering when activated
by the wheel motion.
Power steering tank no-05-25-5

The tank is made of steel plate, and includes cleaning cartridges, lid, oil level indicator, and venting.
Technical data:
Tank volume l (gal US) 3 (0,8)
3 –1
Through-flow, input dm .min (gal US/min) 25 (6,6)
Weight of empty tank kg (lb) 5 (11)
Filtering capacity m 10
138 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
1.3. LUBRICANTS AND GLUES
Oil content
Only good quality hydraulic oils are used in the hydraulic loop to ISO 6743/4 HM or HV.
like
DIN 51 524 part 2 HLP or DIN 51 524 part 3 HLP
CETOP RP 91 H
Kinetic viscosity 46 mm 2.s –1 at 40 C (104 F) - ISO VG 46
Manufacturer Oil type

Class HM (HLP) HV (HVLP)
Viscosity to ISO 6743/4, DIN 51519 VG 46 VG 68 VG 46
Viscosity to CETOP RP 91H HM 46 HM 68 HV 46
AGIP OSO 46 OSO 68 ARNICA 46
ARAL VITAM GF46 VITAM GF 68 VITAM HF 46
AVIA AVILUB RSL 46 AVILUB RSL 68 AVILUB HVI 46
BENZINA OH-HM 46 OH- HM 68 OH- HV46
BP ENERGOL HLP 46 ENERGOL HLP 68 BARTRAN HV 46
BULGARIA MX- M/46 MX- M/ 68 MX- B/46
CASTROL HYSPIN AWS 46 HYSPIN AWS 68 HYSPIN AWH 46
CHEVRON EP HYDR.OIL 46 EP HYDR.OIL 68 EP HYDR.OIL 46 HV
DEA ASTRON HLP 46 ASTRON HLP 68 –
ELF ELFOLNA 46 ELFOLNA 68 HYDRELF 46
ESSO NUTO H 46 NUTO H 68 UNIVIS N 46
FINA HYDRAN 46 HYDRAN 68 HYDRAN HV 46
FUCHS RENOLIN B 15 RENOLIN B 20 RENOLIN MR 46 HV
HUNGARY HIDROKOMOL P 46 HIDROKOMOL P 68 HIDROKOMOL HV 46
MOBIL MOBIL DTE 25 MOBIL DTE 26 MOBIL DTE 15
MV HLP 46 HLP 68 HLP-M46
POLAND HYDROL 30 HYDROL 40 BOXOL 26
ROMANIA H 46 EP H 68 EP -
RUSSIA IGP 30 IGP 38 -
SHELL TELLUS OIL 46 TELLUS OIL 68 TELLUS OIL T 46
TEXACO ALCOR OIL DD46 ALCOR OIL DD68 ALCOR OIL DD-Z 46
TOTAL AZOLLA ZS 46 AZOLLA ZS 68 EQUIVIS ZS 46
008 910 64 BOMAG 139

5.6 Steering
Grease
Synthetic grease with Lithium and of consistency to NLGI -2*, see table

2. POSSIBLE DEFECTS AND REMEDIES
Defect Cause Locating defect and remedy
Steering is non-functional, the Low oil (seepage, broken hose Check hydraulic loop, repair, add oil
wheel freezes up
Steering doesn't function in Low pressure-defective priority valve Check pressure, should be 14 MPa (2030 PSI)
difficult terrain with wheel in extreme position
Low pressure, defective power steering Replace or have it repaired
Low pressure, defective pump 1. Check pressure at test point, 14 MPa

(mechanical connection) (2030 PSI) with wheel in extreme position.
2. check mechanical connection of pump to
CLARK1 gearbox
Power steering functions only to Faulty reversible valve in valve block of Let specialists investigate
one side power steering
Test point of the system, see Fig. G/1.
Should steering be out of order, stop the engine. Steering pump could be damaged.
Fig. G/1
140 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
3. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF THE STEE- • Place the roller horizontally on a firm surface.
RING ASSEMBLY • Switch battery breaker off – the roller’s brakes are auto-
matically on.
3.1. PREPARATORY WORK • Place a notice on the steering wheel – ”THE ROLLER IS
BEING REPAIRED”.
• Preparatory work and the assembly should be performed
according to introductory chapter Safety Precautions and
Instructions. Observe ecological and health regulations.
Fig. G/2
1 -P f ee i g 2-Q10R JIHOSTROJ
2 - Ta i h fi e JIHOSTROJ
3 - Se ee i g LAGC 200LSD REXROTH
4 - H d a ic c i de
f ee i g HV80/40/200 SB INMART
5 - Va e gica XWV8-PL PARKER
6 - Mea i g ic c e SKK20-15L-PK STAUFF
8 - P i i Va e REXROTH
008 910 64 BOMAG 141

5.6 Steering
142 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
3.3. DISASSEMBLY OF O ER STEERING 3.3.1.DISASSEMBLY OF STEERING COLUMN
• Remove lid from the panel. • Remove cover in the center of the column.
• Disconnect hoses from power steering, Fig. G/5 before • Remove nut 1 , insert fixture no.1 under the wheel, Fig.
that, note the connection of hoses. G/6, and with the spanner remove the wheel.
• Remove power steering from the steering column. • Remove collar of travel control 1 , Fig. G/7.
• Re-assemble in reverse order. • After screws were removed, separate power steering,
and remove steering column from the bottom, Fig. G/8.
• Assemble in reverse order. Grease grooved shaft of the
column, to 1.3.
Fig. G/5 Fig. G/7
Fig. G/6 Fig. G/8
¹. 1
008 910 64 BOMAG 143

5.6 Steering
3. . DISASSEMBLY OF LINEAR HYDRAULIC MOTOR Fig. G/11
Removal from machine

• Place the roller on firm, flat surface, and a catch basin
under the hydraulic cylinder. 4
• Remove high-pressure hoses, Fig. G/9. 59
• Remove safety rings 5 and nipples 0 on the pins. nock
out pins, slide the hydraulic motor from the steering lever
and bracket, Fig. G/10, G/11.
60
Removal of hydraulic motor – replacement of seals
Place catch basin under the hydraulic motor, plug openings.
Drill out safety pin from the face of the front lid 1 , or bend out
the lid holder 1 , as re uired by the type of motor. Remove
lid 1 using fixture no , slide piston rod with piston 3 ,
loosen screw 5 , remove nut 4 , remove piston 3 , and lid
1 , see ig. G/12. Replace seals, see. Fig. G/13 - dip in oil
before assembly.
Fig. G/9 Fig. G/12
Fig. G/10 Fig. G/13
59
3 4
60
144 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
Assembly of hydraulic motor 3. . REMO AL OF O ER STEERING TAN
ubricate sliding faces, watch for damage of sliding faces.
evel out seals and install new seals with parts. Wait at least • Drain oil from steering loop on the leftt side of rear wheels,
15 minutes before installing new seals in the hydraulic motor. Fig. G/3.
se fixture no. for mounting the piston rod with the piston in
the cylinder. Tighten bolts to tor ue of table.
• Drain balance of oil from tank.
• Remove front cover.
Tightening torque values • Disconnect high- and low-pressure hoses, Fig. G/14.
• Remove fixing screw and the tank.
Connection piston rod, Connection cylinder, lid,
piston, nuts nuts • Reassemble in reverse order.
Thread Tor ue m lb ft Thread Tor ue m lb ft
30x 0 00 85x 3 0 3
Reassemble in reverse order. ubricate pins with grease of

table section 1.3.
Fig. G/14
008 910 64 BOMAG 145

5.6 Steering
3. . REMO AL AND INSTALLATION OF THE LE ER Fig. G/15

ASSEMBLY
Removal
• Remove linear hydraulic motor, see section 3.5.
• Remove cotter pin , unscrew nuts 3 from ball oint 3 , 3
and knock them out from yoke holes 1, Fig G/15.
• oosen and unscrew bolts 30, remove pad and ring 0. 1
Remove from the pin the steering lever 4 together with pull
rods, and the other ring 0, Fig. G/16.
• Remove nuts , screw 8 from holes on the circumferen-
2 36
ce of pin 3. nock out pin 3 from frame, Fig. G/17.
• Press out bron e bushing Fig. 18.
Fig. G/16
20 22
30
30
4
Fig. G/17
72 72
68
68
146 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
Installation . AD USTMENT OF TOE IN
• Press bushing into the steering lever, Fig. G/18.
Installation data
• Press in and tighten ball oints of connecting rods 3 into
the conical openings of the steering lever 4, Fig. G/19. fork extension mm in 115 4,5
• Press pin 3 into frame, and screw pin 3 to the frame. piston rod extension mm in 4 3,
• Place ring 0 and steering lever 4 on pin 4, the other ring steering lever swing deg 3
0. nsert pad and tighten screws 30, secure screws
with safety wire against turning.
• nsert the fixed eyelet of the linear hydraulic motor 54 in
the holder on the frame, and two rings. Center out. Press
pin 4 in the hole and secure with ring 5 . lide out piston
rod and insert rings, center out, press in pin 8, and
secure with ring 5 , Figs. G/10, 11.
Fig. G/18 Fig. G/19
4
4
27
36 36
008 910 64 BOMAG 147

5.6 Steering
• lide the fork of the front axle 1 out of guiding bushings Fig. G/21
to a distance of Fig. G/20.
• Place a ruler to the hubs of wheels 1, and line up both
axles to the ruler, see Fig. G/21.
• xtend piston rod of the linear hydraulic motor to - 4
mm 3. from end position as in Fig. G/22.
• oosen clamping of ball oints on steering rods 3 , and by
turning steering rods ad ust ball oints against conical
holes in fork brackets 1, Fig. G/23.
• Press ball oints in the conical holes, and secure with a nut
and a cotter pin.
• ix steering rods at both ends by tightening the clamp.
• Connect hoses to hydraulic motors. ubricate pins with
grease to table in section 1.3.
Fig. G/22
94
Fig. G/20
Fig. G/23
36
148 BOMAG 008 910 64

Steering 5.6
. FI TURES
no. 1 ounting fixture 4-3 4-011 - for removal of stee-

ring wheel
no. ey for removing the lid 10 - 55-00 ,

- 55 00 4
no. 3 Guiding bushing - 44-031
008 910 64 BOMAG 149

5.6 Steering
150 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.7 Service Brake
008 910 64 BOMAG 151

5.7 Service Brake
H - SERVICE BRAKE 1. SPECIFICATIONS
1. Specifications 1.1. DESCRIPTION

1.1. Description
Service brake is controlled by a pedal from the driver’s
1.2. Specifications
position. It is a hydraulic-pneumatic loop with a built-in com-
1.3. Brake fluid pressor, air dryer, brake pedal, hydraulic-pneumatic boos-
ters, fluid tanks, pipes, and brake assemblies in rear wheels.
Pressurized air in the tank has a pressure of 0,65 MPa (94.5
2. Defects PSI), and is piped to two brake pedals. When one of the
pedals is depressed, the air flows from the air-tank through
pipes under 0.65 MPa to the two-way valve 4 and the boos-
3. Disassembly and assembly
ters.
In the boosters, the air pressure is transformed to brake fluid
3.2. Disassembly of pedal brake pressure, which is then piped to brake cylinders that operate
3.3. Disassembly of booster the brake shoes in rear wheels. When the brakes are relea-
sed, the fluid travels back under pressure to the booster. Air
3.4. Disassembly of brake system escapes from the air-cylinder back to the brake assembly,
and through the middle of the upper release in the open air.
4. Brake shoes adjustment
5. Service brake venting
6. Machining brake drums
152 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
Fig. H/1
008 910 64 BOMAG 153

5.7 Service Brake
Lege d:
1 - Ai D e WABCO
2-C Va e WABCO
3 - Re ief Va e WABCO
4 - D b e chec Va e WABCO
5 - Wa e e a a KNORR AUTOBRZDY
6 - Peda b a e a e KNORR AUTOBRZDY
8 - Ai e e i 35 GASTEC
9 - Va e e ec ic EV68 AIR PRODUCTS
10 - Va e - e KNORR AUTOBRZDY
11 - S i ch e e APS
12 - S i ch e e APS
13 - B a e c i de i g KNORR AUTOBRZDY
15 - Mea i g ic c e WABCO
16 - Ma e e Ti e MOTOMETER
17 - Ma ee Ba e MOTOMETER
18 - Ai e e i* 5 GASTEC
19 - B e
20 - Va e e ec ic
154 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS AIR-FLUID BOOSTER
Description
BRAKE CIRCUIT
The booster consists of its air section and the hydraulic main
Brake cylinders mm (in) 38 (1,5) brake cylinder. The boosting air section is controlled by the
Air service pressure MPa (PSI) 0,65 (94) main brake of the air loop. When the brake pedal is depres-
sed, air under pressure enters the space of the air cylinder,
Diameter of brake drums mm (in) 400 H11 (15,7) and pushes the piston that exercises pressure on the main
Brake lining – gauge mm (in) 8 (0,314) brake cylinder.
Brake pedal Specifications
Funktion Main cylinder mm (in) ∅ 39 (1,53)

By depressing the pedal, the force is transferred over a Air cylinder mm (in) ∅ 170 (6,69)
spring to the upper discharge that moves downwards until it Force of air cylinder N (lb) 12250 (2754)
rests on a cap in the pressure chamber of the centerpiece. 2
with pressure kp/cm (lb/sq.in) 6 (85,3)
The opening for the release of pressurized air from brake
cylinders is closed. With further shifting, the cap is removed Maxim.lift of main cylinder mm (in) 45 (1,77)
from the seat of the first loop, and air under pressure from the 3
Maximum delivered volume cm (cu.in) 51 (3,11)
air-tank is released in the space under the upper discharge
and the brake cylinders. The other loop is plugged. service air pressure kp/cm2 (lb/sq.in) 6 (85,3)
Residual pressure in main
cylinder within kp/cm2 0,8-1,3
Specifications (lb/sq.in) (11,38-18,48)
Nominal pressure MPa (PSI) 0,6 (87)
Maximal force on the pedal N (lb) 250 (55)
Total play of the pedal (deg) 28
Free travel (deg) 8
Smooth braking (deg) 14
Emergency braking (deg) 6
Service pressure MPa (PSI) 0,8 (116)
Weight kg (lb) 3,5 (7,7)
008 910 64 BOMAG 155

5.7 Service Brake
COMPRESSOR AIR DRYER

is the source of compressed air for the loop of brakes. The Function
input is connected to the engine intake manifold.
Cleans and dries air to the compressor. Prevents corrosion
Use only metal (copper) connectors. and break up of lubrication films.
When during manual venting of the air tank oil appears mixed Drying is based on the absorption in the molecular sieve
with water, check (drying, high porosity, granulated desiccant) through which
- oil consumption in the compressor pressurized air flows into the compressor. Air humidity is
absorbed by the desiccant. To regenerate the desiccant, part
- regeneration to an excessive contra-pressure of the dried air is released at atmospheric pressure and
- whether switching off pressure has been reached, and blown in the opposite direction through the desiccant. The
thus, the time for the compressor to switch on. drop in pressure causes the vapor pressure drop in the
regenerated air (= extremely dry air). This way, the regene-
rated air is capable of absorbing moisture in the desiccant.
Check oil consumption
With the engine warmed up to service temperature Specifications
- disconnect input and output hoses from compressor
Service pressure max. bar (PSI) 13 (188,5)
- let the engine run for about 2 minutes at half RPM of full –1 –1
Air flow max. l.min (gal US.min ) 1000 (264)
range (cleaning mode)
Operation at temperature C –40 +80
- Place a white piece of paper on a firm pad in the air stream
( F) (–40 +176)
for about 5 minutes at about 1500 RPM.
Exhaust noise level dB (A) 78
At low oil consumption of less than 1,5 g/hod.(low wear), the
compressor will leave an oily fog on the paper. Switching off pressure bar (PSI) 6,5 (94)
At high consumption – high wear – a black field will appear on
the paper.
BRAKE SWITCH
With insufficient compressor output, check
Switches on brake lights with the increased pressure of
- narrowing of pressure piping (carbon deposits) brake fluid.
- tightness of the assembly Specifications
- If no defects found, remove cylinder head and recheck Nominal voltage V 6, 12, 24
intake and pressure blade, and seals,
Max. power W 60
- With high deposits of carbon, check temperature and oil
consumption of the compressor. Max. service temperature C ( F) 85 (185)
When replacing the compressor, check output piping for Pressure for switching on kPa (PSI) 300-600 (43,5-87)
possible carbon deposits. If necessary, replace it, as well as Max. service pressure kPa (PSI) 35000 (5075)
the pressure regulator and air dryer.
156 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
1.3. BRAKE FLUID
Fluid is according to International standards ISO 4925, SAE

J 1703 f, DOT 3, and is not suitable for arctic conditions. It
may be mixed with fluids of same standards The fluid may be
used in systems working at –50 C (–58 F) to 60 C (140 F),
and service temperatures from –50 C (–58 F) to 205 C
(400 F). Also a fluid to DOT 4 (Syntol HD 260) standard may
be used. The fluid should be changed within 2 years or after
2000 service hours, whichever occurs first.
2. DEFECTS
Loop defect Cause Determination (remedy) of defect
Low efficiency of braking Low pressure in air system Adjust regulator to 0.65 Mpa (94 PSI)
Defective booster Test pressure in hydraulic section- 1.2 Mpa
Air locks Vent per par. 3.5.
Lining wear Check, replace shoes, per 3.4.
Soiled lining (grease) Check per 3.4.
Brake assembly defect Cause Remedy
With depressed pedal, Faulty seal of the cap and Defect remedy is not urgent. First depress pedal several times
pressure is escaping the upper release fast. The deposits will blow off. Should this not help,
through venting holes disassemble, clean contact areas and inspect seats and seal,
and/or apply emery paper to cap evenly, or replace.
With released pedal, Faulty contact of caps with Correct defect in the same manner as above
pressure escapes seats in the body
through venting holes
out.
With released pedal, Plugged filter cartridge or Disassemble, wash filter cartridge, clean release, and/or clean
pressure escape from stiff guides of releases (dried with fine emery and apply a light film of anti-freezing grease.
piping and cylinders is out grease, dirt, ground in)
too slow
008 910 64 BOMAG 157

5.7 Service Brake
Test point of brake system air loop

Brake assembly - pressure 0÷ 0,65 MPa (0 ÷ 94 PSI) accor-
ding to pressure on brake, Fig. H/2.
Spring-loaded cylinder - pressure 0,53 ÷ 0,65 MPa (77 ÷ 94
PSI), Fig. H/3.
Fig. H/2 Fig. H/3
158 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
3. DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION 3.2. DISASSEMBLY OF PEDAL BRAKE
Perform preparations, disassembly and assembly according • Release pressurized air from the air loop by pulling on the
to the introductory chapter ”Safety precautions and instruc- chain of the venting valve on the air tank.
tions”, keep ecological and health precautions. • Remove floor cover plates at the service place.
• Unscrew fillers on both sides of the brake outlets, Fig.
3.1. PREPARATIONS H/4.
• Remove 4 screws and remove the brake, Fig. H/5.
• Secure front wheels on both sides with wooden blocks. Installation
• Switch off batteries – the machine is automatically locked. in reverse order.
• Place notice “MACHINE OUT OF ORDER” on the stee-
ring wheel.
Fig. H/4 Fig. H/5
008 910 64 BOMAG 159

5.7 Service Brake
3.3. DISASSEMBLY OF BOOSTER Installation of booster

• Install splitter and reduction on the booster.
• Remove floor cover plates at the service place.
• Screw booster on brackets on the frame.
• Drain brake fluid into a ready basin by unscrewing plug 8
• Screw fitting of air intake between the booster and the
at the output of the booster and by stepping on the pedal
brake.
several times.
• Attach input hose of brake fluid.
• Remove hose 11 of the brake fluid input from the tank to
the brake cylinder, disconnect wiring from switch 22. • Pour brake fluid in the container, and vent the entire
system, see 3.3.
• Remove bolts of input 58 from the brake to the booster,
Fig. H/6.
• Remove booster from the frame.
• Remove brake fluid splitter 25 and reduction 5, Fig. H/7.
Fig. H/6 Fig. H/7
11
22
58
5
25
8
160 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
3.4. DISASSEMBLY OF BRAKE SYSTEM Disassembly of brake cylinders in wheels
• The wheel and brake drum should be off.
Disassembly of shoes
• Remove leaking brake cylinders.
• If the thickness of lining is less than 2 mm (0,08 in),or if the
• Clean the surface of the brake cylinders and pistons.
lining is considerably soiled by grease, replace the lining.
• Remove seal collars.
• Remove wheel (see Chapter. D).
• Inspect carefully inside surfaces of cylinders.
• Remove pipes to brake cylinders in the wheels. Catch
escaping fluid in a ready basin. • Replace complete wheel cylinder, if damage to the active
face discovered (grooves, corrosion, etc.).
• Remove brake drum off flanges, use forcing-off screws in
the holes of the drum, Fig. H/8. • For cleaning the wheel brake cylinder (the main brake
cylinder) use wood alcohol - never clean with cleaners
• Remove springs and shoes, Fig. H/9.
containing mineral oils!
Installation of brake system

• Install in reverse order.
• Keep sliding faces clean and degreased. Brake compo-
nents may not be exposed to oily matters.
• Following the reconnection of pipes to the brake cylinder,
fill loop with brake fluid, and vent. Adjust brakes thereaf-
ter, and replace wheel.
Fig. H/8 Fig. H/9
2
1
008 910 64 BOMAG 161

5.7 Service Brake
4. BRAKE SHOES ADJUSTMENT Adjust only when the brakes are cold.
For equal braking effect replace all shoes together.
• This hydraulic power brake is self-adjustable in both
brake shoes by means of a float (1). The adjustment free
Always replace damaged adjustment assembly.
play between the shoe and the drum is done by the Let only professionals glue lining on shoes.
adjusting ratchet (2), Fig. H/10.
As replacement, use original shoes with KNOTT lining only!
• With the wheel removed, see Chapter “D”, and installed
brake drums. Warranty lapses, if other than original spare parts were
• With low pressure in the brake loop, release mechanical used.
brake cylinder of the disk brake (park brake) by turning
the release screw (1), following the removal of plug (2)
and the application of fixture (1) in the spring loaded
cylinder (3), Fig. H/11.
• Turn the drum through the adjustment opening down-
wards to the adjustment ratchet (2), Fig. H/12.
• Turn ratchet wheel (2), Fig. H/10 until the shoe rests on
the drum, and the drum cannot be turned.
• Return the ratchet wheel until the drums are released.
The drum can be turned freely without any audible friction Fig. H/11
of the drum against the shoes.
• Replace the wheels.
Fig. H/10 Fig. H/12
2 2
162 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service Brake 5.7
5. SERVICE BRAKE VENTING 6. MACHINING BRAKE DRUMS
• Pour specified brake fluid in the equalizing container of • Brake drums may be machined only if worn out or if
the brake loop, and maintain level above ”MIN” during damaged by deep grooves on the friction surface.
venting.
• Install brake systems on drums machined to identical
• Loosen venting screw on the booster by two turns, Fig. diameters. It is not allowed to install brake drums of
H/13. different diameters on the individual pairs of the brake
system.
• When the booster is full, tighten the vent screw.
• The diameter of machined brake drum may not exceed
• Loosen venting screw on the brake cylinder and attach a
the maximum allowed diameter.
hose to its head. Insert the other end in a glass containing
fluid (the end must be submerged).
• Start the engine and pressurize the brake system to Original diameter Maximum diameter after machining
maximum value of 0,65 MPa (6,5 bar) (94 PSI), then mm (in) mm (in)
switch the engine off. 400 H11 (15,7) 402,5 (15,8)
• Fill the loop completely by repeated stepping on the
pedal and simultaneous addition of fluid in the equalizing
The friction faces are coaxial to the drum axis to ± 0,10 mm.
container.
• When bubbles stop coming out of the submerged hose,
tighten the venting screw and remove the hose. All drums must be machined to the same diameter.
• Venting can be done on all drums simultaneously, Fig. In machined drums, brake shoes of thicker lining must be used
H/14. – contact the manufacturer of the cylinder or the brakes.
• Add fluid in the equalizing container to specified level.
• Before the engine is started, the travel control must be
in position ”N”, and the roller must have park brakes
on.
Fig. H/14
Fig. H/13
1
1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3
008 910 64 BOMAG 163

5.7 Service Brake
164 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.8 Parking brake
008 910 64 BOMAG 165

5.8 Parking brake
I - PARKING BRAKE 1. SPECIFICATIONS - DESCRIPTION
1. Specifications - description 1.1. DESCRIPTION

1.1. Description
The brake is used as parking or emergency brake.
1.2. Specifications
When the roller stops and the engine is switched off the brake
is applied automatically. The brake is released when the
2. Maintenance engine is started and the air in the loop is compressed to 0,53
2.1. Disassembly and installation of the disk brake MPa (5,3 bar; 77 PSI). It is signaled by the indicator going off.
2.2. Removal and installation of the spring-loaded cy- Braking of the roller is accomplished by depressing the
linder button on the dashboard. This causes the solenoid to open,
air escapes from the spring-loaded cylinder and the pressure
on the spring drops. The spring returns to its original positi-
on. The lever mechanism contracts the jaws on the disk of the
brake, and the roller is stopped.
The roller can be stopped in case of emergency by the
service brake when the push-button is depressed on the
dashboard. The roller and the engine stop.
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal pressure MPa (PSI) 0,8 (116)

Lift mm (in) 70 (2,76)
Pressure with piston rod
extended (brake off) kN 3,8
Pressure with piston rod
retracted (brake on) kN 2,5
Weight kg (lb) 5,75 (12,7)
166 BOMAG 008 910 64

Parking brake 5.8
2. MAINTENANCE Fig. I/1
After 1000 hours of service, the collars should be inspected

and the sliding parts greased. Inspect the piston rod lift. It is
not recommended to use more than 2/3 of the full lift of the
rod.
Attention! When disassembling the base of the chamber
with the spring, be careful not to get hurt, since the spring
is installed in the depressed state and loaded by about
4000 N.
2.1. DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF THE

DISK BRAKE
• Position the roller on a firm, flat surface, the front and rear
wheels wedged on both sides.
• Remove the center floor cover.
• Unload the lever by screw (1) (accessory) into the cylin-
der (2) Fig. I/1. Fig. I/2
• Remove the flange of the crankshaft (146) from the side of
the brake disk (6), slide in and fold to side, Fig. I/2.
6
• Loosen and remove nut (1), Fig. I/3.
• Remove nuts (24) on yoke (20), pull-rod (7) from brake
yoke (20), Fig. I/4.
• Slide disk (6) with the yoke (28) off the groove off the
differential pinion.
• Assemble in reverse order. The safety nut may be reused, 146
but it must be knocked into the other differential pinion
groove.
Fig. I/3
008 910 64 BOMAG 167

5.8 Parking brake
2.2. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE

SPRING-LOADED CYLINDER
• Unload the lever by the screw (accessory) in the cylinder,

Fig. I/1.
• Disconnect the yoke (3) of the cylinder (35) from the lever
(2), Fig. I/4.
• Disconnect air hose.
• Install in reverse order.
Fig. I/4
168 BOMAG 008 910 64

5.9 Wheels
008 910 64 BOMAG 169

5.9 Wheels
J - INFLATING THE TIRES 1. SPECIFICATIONS
1. Specifications 1.1. DESCRIPTION

1.1. Description
Compressed air is led through plastic tubes from the air tank
1.2. Specifications
over a by-pass valve to a return valve to the distributor, where
it is distributed to the rear and front axles, and then over
2. Removal and installation rotors to individual wheels. Each wheel has a safety valve
adjusted so that other tires remain inflated to 0,18 MPa when
2.1. Control valve one of them is punctured. The other control valve connected
2.2. Rotor to the loop through the distributor is used to deflate the tires.
The pressure in the loop is read on the manometer on the
dashboard. The assembly makes it possible to change pres-
sure in the tires en-route.
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
Air pressure in the loop max. 0,6 MPa

Adjustment of the safety valve 0,18 MPa
Observe safety during work with the engine off. Keep indivi-
dual parts and hoses clean, screws tight. Adjust and test the
air loop so that air escapes less than 0,1 atm in12 hours.
170 BOMAG 008 910 64

Wheels 5.9
2. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 2.2. ROTOR
2.1. CONTROL VALVE Removal

• The rotor attaches the firm part to the rotary part of the of
Release pressurized air from the inflating loop by opening the conduits, and is located in the fixed center of the
the release valve before starting dissembling. wheels.
• Remove hose (2) and rotor (1), Fig. J/1 - 4x back, 2x in
front.
• Remove screw (7), lid (3), safety rings (8, 9), Fig. J/2.
• Press out the shaft (1).
• Press out bearings (6), lid (4).
Installation
• Place the lid (4) on the shaft (1), and press in bearings (6)
- secure with 2 safety rings (9).
• Insert collar (5) in the collar (3) body, screw into bearings
(2) and secure with screw (7).
• Fill bearing (2) with grease.
• Insert shaft (1) with bearings into body (2) and secure with
safety ring (8).
Fig. J/1 Fig. J/2
008 910 64 BOMAG 171

5.9 Wheels
K - WHEELS 2. REMOVAL OF WHEELS
1. Specifications 2.1. PREPARATION FOR WORK

1.1. Description
1.2. Specifications
• In preparation for work and handling of wheels, follow the
introductory chapter on Safety. Observe ecology and
health regulations.
2. Wheel removal • The valve for inflating tires must be closed.
2.1. Preparation • Place the roller horizontally on a firm surface.
2.2. Front axle wheels
• Switch the battery breaker off – the brakes of the roller are
2.3. Rear axle wheels automatically on.
• Place a sign on the steering wheel saying “ROLLER OUT
3. Removal and installation of tires OF SERVICE”.
• Wedge front wheels on both sides when removing rear
wheels.
4. Installation of wheels
5. Adjustment of safety valve

2.2. FRONT AXLE WHEELS
1. SPECIFICATIONS • Lift the front of the machine by suitable means, Fig. K/1.
• Unscrew the rotor from the axle.
1.1. DESCRIPTION
• Unscrew hose (2) from the safety valve (3), thereafter also
All versions of roller VP 2400 have as standard 4 wheels on the valve from the tire.
the front and rear axles. The tires are inflated from the air loop • Remove wheel nuts (4) and take off the wheel, Fig. K/2.
of the machine, centrally. Should any tire be punctured, the
other tires maintain air pressure of (0,18 MPa) secured by the
safety valve on the tire.
1.2. SPECIFICATIONS
Disk wheel 8,0 - 20 HD

Tire Compactor without any design
11.00x20" PR16
Tube 11.00x20"
Protective inlay 11.00x20"
Tightening torque of wheel nuts 440 Nm
Fig. K/1
Tire inflation - see Service Manual VP 2400
172 BOMAG 008 910 64

Wheels 5.9
2.3. REAR AXLE WHEELS
outside wheels
• Lift the rear end of the machine by suitable means, Fig.
K/3, and support them on a pad above ground.
• Unscrew hose (2) from the axle shaft.
• Unscrew this hose also from the safety valve (4), thereaf-
ter also the valve from the tire.
• Remove wheel nuts and take off the wheel.
inside wheels
• Unscrew hoses (2) and (3) from rotor (1).
• Remove rotor (1) from the center shaft of the axle.
• Remove wheel nuts and take off the wheel.
• Unscrew hose (3) from the safety valve (4), thereafter also
the valve from the tire Fig. K/4.
Fig. K/2
4 2
3
1
Fig. K/3 Fig. K/4
008 910 64 BOMAG 173

5.9 Wheels
3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TIRES 5. SAFETY VALVE ADJUSTMENT
We recommend doing this on special machines in service Loosen safety valve nut (1) and adjust the setscrew (2) so that
shops, wheel balancing as well. its face is in line with the face of the nut, Fig. K/5.
4. INSTALLATION OF WHEEL TO THE MACHINE
• Follow reverse order.

• Place wheel disk on wheel nuts.
• Insert and screw wheel nuts in criss-cross pattern, tighten
with torque of 330 ÷ 350 Nm (245 ÷ 260 ft lb).
• In connecting tire inflation assembly, follow reverse order.
Tighten all joints well.
• When replacing tubes, check that the original filling valve
has been removed before installing a new valve in a tire
with a new outlet.
Fig. K/5
174 BOMAG 008 910 64

6 Suppliers documentation
008 910 64 BOMAG 175

176 BOMAG 008 910 64
6.1 Powershift transmission
008 910 64 BOMAG 177

178 BOMAG 008 910 64

Powershift transmission 6.1
Maintenance and Service Manual
T20000
Powershift
Transmission
2 & 3 SPEED INLINE
SPICER® OFF HIGHWAY-PRODUCTS™
008 910 64 BOMAG 814995

179
TOWING OR PUSHING
Before towing the vehicle, be sure to lift the rear wheels off the ground or disconnect the driveline to avoid
damage to the transmission during towing.
©Copyright DANA CORPORATION 1990. Unpublished material.
All rights reserved.
Limited Distribution.
No part of this work may be reproduced in any form under any means
without direct written permission of the DANA CORPORATION.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99

180 BOMAG 008 910 64
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to provide the customer and the maintenance personnel with information
and instructions on the maintenance and repair of the SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS product.
Extreme care has been exercised in the design, selection of materials, and manufacturing of these units.
The slight outlay in personal attention and cost required to provide regular and proper lubrication,
inspection at stated intervals, and such adjustments as may be indicated will be reimbursed many times
in low cost operation and trouble free service.
In order to become familiar with the various parts of the product, its principle of operation,
troubleshooting and adjustments, it is urged that the mechanic studies the instructions in this manual
carefully and uses it as a reference when performing maintenance and repair operations.
Whenever repair or replacement of component parts is required,

only SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS approved parts as listed in the applicable parts manual
should be used. Use of “will-fit” or non-approved parts may endanger proper operation and performance
of the equipment. SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS does not warrant repair or replacement parts,
nor failures resulting from the use of parts which are not supplied by or approved
by SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS .
IMPORTANT
ALWAYS FURNISH THE DISTRIBUTOR WITH THE SERIAL AND MODEL NUMBER WHEN ORDERING PARTS.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99

008 910 64 BOMAG 181
2 - SPEED TRANSMISSION
FWD
REV 2ND 1ST
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99

182 BOMAG 008 910 64
3 - SPEED TRANSMISSION
FWD 3RD
REV 2ND 1ST
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99

008 910 64 BOMAG 183
Table of Contents
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND LEGEND SYMBOLS

2.1 CLEANING .............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Bearings ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 Housings ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 INSPECTION ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Bearings ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.2 Oil Seals, Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.3 Gears and Shafts ........................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.4 Housing, Covers, etc. .................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 LEGEND SYMBOLS ................................................................................................................ 2-2
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF THE UNIT ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 WEIGHT, DIMENSIONS, OIL CAPACITY ................................................................................ 3-1
3.3 TIGHTENING TORQUES ........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.1 Torque specifications for lubricated or plated screw threads ......................................... 3-2
3.3.2 Elastic stop nut torque ................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.3 “O”-ring port plug torque chart ....................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.4 Pipe plug torque chart ................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.5 Permanent metric plug torque chart .............................................................................. 3-3
3.3.6 Coil and cartridge torque ............................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 3-5
3.5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 3-6
3.6 HYDRAULIC COOLER AND FILTER LINE SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 3-6
4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 OIL SPECIFICATION .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Recommended lubricants .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS .................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1 Daily ............................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Normal drain period ....................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 SERVICING MACHINE AFTER COMPONENTS OVERHAUL ................................................ 4-4
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 I-i

184 BOMAG 008 910 64
5. INSTALLATION DETAILS
5.1 CONVERTER DRIVE COUPLING ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 TRANSMISSION TO ENGINE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................... 5-2
5.3 EXTERNAL PLUMBING .......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.1 Optional: remote filter .................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Cooler & filter lines specifications .................................................................................. 5-3
5.4 SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 5-4
6. OPERATION OF THE TRANSMISSION

6.1 THE TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 The converter, pump drive section and pressure regulating valve ................................ 6-2
6.1.2 The input shaft and directional clutches ........................................................................ 6-3
6.1.3 The range clutches ........................................................................................................ 6-4
6.1.4 The output section ......................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.5 The transmission controls (refer to hydraulic diagram) .................................................. 6-5
6.2 ELECTRIC SOLENOID CONTROLS ...................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.1 2-Speed transmission .................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 POWERFLOWS, ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT.............................. 6-7
6.3.1.1 Neutral and 2nd clutch engaged ........................................................................ 6-7
6.3.1.2 Forward 1st speed .............................................................................................. 6-9
6.3.1.3 Forward 2nd speed ........................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.1.4 Reverse 1st speed ............................................................................................ 6-13
6.3.2 3-Speed transmission .................................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.2.1 Neutral and 3rd clutch engaged ....................................................................... 6-15
6.3.2.2 Forward 1st speed ............................................................................................ 6-17
6.3.2.3 Forward 2nd speed ........................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.2.4 Forward 3rd speed ........................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.2.5 Reverse 1st speed ............................................................................................ 6-23
6.4 GEAR AND CLUTCH LAY-OUT ............................................................................................. 6-25
7. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE T20000 TRANSMISSION

7.1 T20000 TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................................................................. 7-1
7.2.1 Stall Test ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.2 Transmission pressure checks ....................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.3 Mechanical and electrical checks .................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.4 Hydraulic checks ............................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.1 Low clutch pressure ....................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.2 Low charging pump output ............................................................................................ 7-3
7.3.3 Overheating ................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3.4 Noisy converter .............................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3.5 Lack of power ................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.4 CHECK POINTS ...................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.5 SPEED SENSOR - STATIC STANDALONE TEST .................................................................. 7-7
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 I-ii

008 910 64 BOMAG 185
8. SECTIONAL VIEWS AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION

GROUP - CONVERTER HOUSING ................................................................................................ 8-2
GROUP - TRANSMISSION CASE AND REAR COVER ................................................................. 8-4
GROUP - TURBINE SHAFT ............................................................................................................ 8-6
GROUP - DRIVE PLATE .................................................................................................................. 8-8
GROUP - TORQUE CONVERTER ................................................................................................ 8-10
GROUP - AUXILIARY PUMP DRIVE ............................................................................................. 8-12
GROUP - PUMP DRIVE ................................................................................................................ 8-14
GROUP - FORWARD SHAFT ........................................................................................................ 8-16
GROUP - REVERSE AND 2ND SHAFT ........................................................................................ 8-18
GROUP - REVERSE IDLER .......................................................................................................... 8-20
GROUP - LOW SPEED SHAFT ..................................................................................................... 8-22
GROUP - OUTPUT AND 3RD SHAFT (3-SPEED) ....................................................................... 8-24
GROUP - OUTPUT SHAFT (2-SPEED) ........................................................................................ 8-26
GROUP - CHARGING PUMP & FILTER ....................................................................................... 8-28
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE (MECHANICAL) .............................................................................. 8-30
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) .......................................................... 8-32
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE MOUNTING .................................................................. 8-34
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ................................................................... 8-36
9. ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
10. DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY T20000 INLINE TRANSMISSION
11. OPTIONS
11.1 PARKING BRAKES ............................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Mechanical Brake ...................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1.1 Sectional views and parts identification ......................................................... 11-2
11.1.1.2 Adjustment and rebuild criteria ....................................................................... 11-7
11.1.1.3 Replacing friction pads ................................................................................... 11-7
11.1.1.4 Disassembly ................................................................................................... 11-8
11.1.1.5 Cleaning and inspection ................................................................................. 11-8
11.1.1.6 Assembly ........................................................................................................ 11-9
11.1.1.7 Replacing mount bushings ............................................................................. 11-9
11.1.1.8 Servicing rotor assembly ................................................................................ 11-9
11.1.2 Spring applied hydraulic released brake (high pressure) ........................................ 11-10
11.1.2.1 Sectional views and parts identification ....................................................... 11-10
11.1.2.2 Operation ...................................................................................................... 11-15
11.1.2.3 Adjustment and rebuild criteria ..................................................................... 11-15
11.1.2.4 Replacing friction pads ................................................................................. 11-15
11.1.2.5 Disassembly ................................................................................................. 11-15
11.1.2.6 Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................... 11-16
11.1.2.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................... 11-16
11.1.2.8 Installation .................................................................................................... 11-17
11.1.2.9 Torque specs ................................................................................................ 11-17
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 I-iii

186 BOMAG 008 910 64
11. OPTIONS (CONTINUED)

11.1.3 Spring applied hydraulic released brake (low pressure) .......................................... 11-18
11.1.3.1 Sectional views and parts identification ....................................................... 11-18
11.1.3.2 Operation ...................................................................................................... 11-23
11.1.3.3 Adjustment and rebuild criteria ..................................................................... 11-23
11.1.3.4 Replacing friction pads ................................................................................. 11-23
11.1.3.5 Disassembly ................................................................................................. 11-23
11.1.3.6 Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................... 11-24
11.1.3.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................... 11-24
11.1.3.8 Installation .................................................................................................... 11-25
11.1.3.9 Torque specs ................................................................................................ 11-25
12. SERVICE TOOLS

12.1 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT NUT SOCKET (TG 1304 - 54) .................................................... 12-1
12.2 OIL SEALING RING SIZING TOOL ....................................................................................... 12-2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 I-iv

008 910 64 BOMAG 187
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To reduce the chance of personal injury and/or property damage,
the following instruction must be carefully observed.
Proper service and repair are important to the safety of the service technician and the safe,
reliable operation of the machine.
If replacement parts are required the part must be replaced by a spare part which has the same part
number or with an equivalent part. Do not use a spare part of lesser quality.
The service procedures recommended in this manual are effective methods for performing service
and repair. Some of these procedures require the use of tools specifically designed for the purpose.
Accordingly, anyone who intends to use a spare part, service procedure or tool,
which is not recommended by SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS, must first determine
that neither his safety nor the safe operation of the machine will be jeopardized by the spare part,
service procedure or tool selected.
IMPORTANT
IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT THIS MANUAL CONTAINS VARIOUS ’CAUTIONS’ AND ‘NOTES’
THAT MUST BE CAREFULLY OBSERVED IN ORDER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY DURING SERVICE
OR REPAIR, OR THE POSSIBILITY THAT IMPROPER SERVICE OR REPAIR MAY DAMAGE THE UNIT OR RENDER IT UNSAFE.
IT IS ALSO IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT THESE ‘CAUTIONS’ AND ‘NOTES’ ARE NOT EXHAUSTIVE,
BECAUSE IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO WARN ABOUT ALL THE POSSIBLE HAZARDOUS CONSEQUENCES THAT MIGHT RESULT
FROM FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 1-1

188 BOMAG 008 910 64
2. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND LEGEND SYMBOLS
2.1 CLEANING
Clean all parts thoroughly using solvent type cleaning fluid. It is recommended that parts be immersed in
cleaning fluid and moved up and down slowly until all old lubricant and foreign material is dissolved and parts
are thoroughly cleaned.
CAUTION
CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED TO AVOID SKIN RASHES, FIRE HAZARDS, AND INHALATION OF VAPOURS WHEN USING
SOLVENT TYPE CLEANERS.
2.1.1 Bearings
Remove bearings from cleaning fluid and strike flat against a block of wood to dislodge solidified particles of
lubricant. Immerse again in cleaning fluid to flush out particles. Repeat above operation until bearings are
thoroughly clean. Dry bearings using moisture-free compressed air. Be careful to direct air stream across
bearing to avoid spinning. Do not spin bearings when drying. Bearings may be rotated slowly by hand to
facilitate drying process.
2.1.2 Housings
Clean interior and exterior of housings, bearing caps, etc…, thoroughly. Cast parts may be cleaned in hot
solution tanks with mild alkali solutions providing these parts do not have ground or polished surfaces.
Parts should remain in solution long enough to be thoroughly cleaned and heated. This will aid the evaporation
of the cleaning solution and rinse water. Parts cleaned in solution tanks must be thoroughly rinsed with clean
water to remove all traces of alkali. Cast parts may also be cleaned with steam cleaner.
CAUTION
CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED TO AVOID INHALATION OF VAPOURS AND SKIN RASHES WHEN USING ALKALI CLEANERS.
All parts cleaned must be thoroughly dried immediately by using moisture-free compressed air or soft, lintless
absorbent wiping rags free of abrasive materials such as metal fillings, contaminated oil, or lapping compound.
2.2 INSPECTION
The importance of careful and thorough inspection of all parts cannot be overstressed. Replacement of all
parts showing indication of wear or stress will eliminate costly and avoidable failures at a later date.
2.2.1 Bearings
Carefully inspect all rollers: cages and cups for wear, chipping, or nicks to determine fitness of bearings for
further use. Do not replace a bearing cone or cup individually without replacing the mating cup or cone at the
same time. After inspection, dip bearings in Automatic Transmission Fluid and wrap in clean lintless cloth or
paper to protect them until installed.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 2-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 189
Cleaning, inspection and legend symbols
2.2.2 Oil Seals, Gaskets, Etc.

Replacement of spring load oil seals, “O”-rings, metal sealing rings, gaskets, and snap rings is more economical
when unit is disassembled than premature overhaul to replace these parts at a future time.
Further loss of lubricant through a worn seal may result in failure of other more expensive parts of the
assembly. Sealing members should be handled carefully, particularly when being installed. Cutting, scratching,
or curling under of lip of seal seriously impairs its efficiency. When assembling new metal type sealing rings,
these should be lubricated with coat of chassis grease to stabilize rings in their grooves for ease of assembly
of mating members. Lubricate all “O”-rings and seals with recommended type Automatic Transmission Fluid
before assembly.
2.2.3 Gears and Shafts

If magna-flux process is available, use process to check parts. Examine teeth on all gears carefully for wear,
pitting, chipping, nicks, cracks, or scores. If gear teeth show spots where case hardening is worn through or
cracked, replace with new gear. Small nicks may be removed with suitable hone. Inspect shafts and quills to
make certain they are not sprung, bent, or splines twisted, and that shafts are true.
2.2.4 Housing, Covers, etc.

Inspect housings, covers and bearing caps to ensure that they are thoroughly clean and that mating surfaces,
bearing bores, etc…, are free from nicks or burrs. Check all parts carefully for evidence of cracks or conditions
which would cause subsequent oil leaks or failures.
2.3 LEGEND SYMBOLS
Smontaggio di sottogruppi Sostituire con ogni montaggio

Disassembly of assembly groups Renew at each reassembly
Montaggio di sottogruppi Togliere - mettere la sicura

Reassemble to from assembly group Unlock - lock e.g. split pin, locking plate, etc.
Smontaggio di particollari ingombranti Mettere la sicura, incollare (mastice liquido)

Remove obstruction parts Lock - adhere (liquid sealant)
Montaggio di particollari ingombranti Evitare danni ai materiali, danni ai pezzi

Reinstall - remount parts which had obstructed disassembly Guard against material damage, damage to parts
Attenzione, indicazione importante Marchiari prima dello smontaggio (per il montaggio)

Attention! important notice Mark before disassembly, observe marks when reasembl.
Controllare regolare p.e. coppie, misure, pressione etc. Carricare riempire (olio - lubrificante)
Check - adjust e.g. torque, dimensions, pressures etc. Filling - topping up - refilling e.g. oil, cooling water, etc.
T = Attrezzature speciali P = Pagina Scarricare olio, lubrificante

T = Special tool P = Page Drain off oil, lubricant
Rispettare direzione di montaggio Tendere

Note direction of installation Tighten - clamp ; tightening a clamping device
Controllare esaminare controllo visuale Insere pressione nel circuito idraulico

Visual inspection Apply pressure into hydraulic circuit
Eventualimente riutilizzable (sostituire se necessario) Pulire

Possibly still serviceable, renew if necessary To clean
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 2-2

190 BOMAG 008 910 64
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 IDENTIFICATION OF THE UNIT

1. Model and type of the unit.
2. Serial number.
3.2 WEIGHT, DIMENSIONS, OIL CAPACITY

Weight (dry): ±380 kg (836 lb.)
T-model
Maximum length: 810.5 mm (31.91”)
Maximum width: 544.8 mm (21.45”)
Maximum height: 547.7 mm (21.56”)
Oil capacity
±10.3 l (2.8 US Gallon) without cooler and hydraulic lines.
Consult operator’s manual on applicable machine for system capacity.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 191
Technical specifications
3.3 TIGHTENING TORQUES
3.3.1 Torque specifications for lubricated or plated screw threads
NOM. SIZE GRADE 5

FINE THREAD COARSE THREAD
LBF - FT [N.m] LBF - FT [N.m]
.2500 9 - 11 [12 - 15] 8 - 10 [11 - 14]

.3125 16 - 20 [22 - 27] 12 - 16 [16 - 22]
.3750 26 - 29 [35 - 39] 23 - 25 [31 - 34]
.4375 41 - 45 [56 - 61] 37 - 41 [50 - 56]
.5000 64 - 70 [87 - 95] 57 - 63 [77 - 85]
.5625 91 - 100 [123 - 136] 82 - 90 [111 - 122]
.6250 128 - 141 [174 - 191] 113 - 124 [153 - 168]
.7500 223 - 245 [302 - 332] 200 - 220 [271 - 298]
NOM. SIZE GRADE 8

FINE THREAD COARSE THREAD
.2500 11 - 13 [15 - 18] 9 - 11 [12 - 15]

.3125 28 - 32 [38 - 43] 26 - 30 [35 - 41]
.3750 37 - 41 [50 - 56] 33 - 36 [45 - 49]
.4375 58 - 64 [79 - 87] 52 - 57 [71 - 77]
.5000 90 - 99 [122 - 134] 80 - 88 [108 - 119]
.5625 128 - 141 [174 - 191] 115 - 127 [156 - 172]
.6250 180 - 198 [224 - 268] 159 - 175 [216 - 237]
.7500 315 - 347 [427 - 470] 282 - 310 [382 - 420]
NOM. SIZE GRADE 8.8 or 9.8 GRADE 10.9

COARSE THREAD COARSE THREAD
M8 15 - 20 [20 - 25] 22 - 26 [30 - 35]

M10 30 - 37 [40 - 50] 44 - 48 [60 - 65]
M12 50 - 55 [65 - 75] 74 - 81 [100 - 110]
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-2

192 BOMAG 008 910 64
3.3.2 Elastic stop nut torque
THREAD SIZE LB - FT [N . m]
1" - 20 150 - 200 [203.4 - 271.1]
1 1/4" - 18 200 - 250 [271.2 - 338.9]
1 1/2" - 18 300 - 350 [406.8 - 474.5]
1 3/4" - 18 400 - 450 [542.4 - 610.1]
3.3.3 “O”-ring port plug torque chart
THREAD SIZE LBF - FT [N . m]

9/16" - 18 12 - 15 [16 - 20]
3/4" - 16 20 - 25 [27 - 34]
3.3.4 Pipe plug torque chart
THREAD NPTF TORQUE

LBF - FT [N.m]
1/16 - 27 5-7 [7 - 9]
1/8 - 27 7 - 10 [9 - 14]
1/4 - 18 15 - 20 [20 - 27]
3/8 - 18 25 - 30 [34 - 41]
1/2 - 14 30 - 35 [41 - 47]
3/4 - 10 40 - 45 [54 - 61]
1 - 11 1/2 55 - 50 [68 - 75]
1 1/4 - 11 1/2 60 - 65 [81 - 88]
3.3.5 Permanent metric plug torque chart
THREAD SIZE TORQUE

LBF - FT [N.m]
M18 x 1.5 6H 25-30 [34-41]

M26 x 1.5 6H 45-50 [61-68]
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-3

008 910 64 BOMAG 193
3.3.6 Coil and cartridge torque
A: tighten cartridge to 22-27 N.m (16-20 LBF-FT)

B B: tighten cartridge nuts to 5-7 N.m (4-5 LBF-FT)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-4

194 BOMAG 008 910 64
3.4 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATIONS

• Normal operating temperature 70 - 120 °C (158 - 248 F) measured at temperature check port
converter out (port 71 - **).
• Maximum allowed transmission temperature 120 °C (248 F).
• Transmission regulator pressure (*) - (neutral) - port 31 (**).
- At 600 RPM min. 16.5 bar (240 PSI) minimum.
- At 2200 RPM: 19.3 bar (280 PSI) maximum.
• Pump flow (*)

- At 1800 RPM in neutral: 54.9 l/min. minimum (14.5 GPM).
• Clutch pressures (*)

- 1st clutch: port 41 (**).
- 2nd clutch: port 42 (**).
- 3rd clutch: port 43 (**).
- Forward clutch: port 45 (**).
- Reverse clutch: port 46 (**).
NOTE
THE 2-SPEED TRANSMISSION HAS NO 3RD CLUTCH.
At 2000 RPM :
- 16.5 - 19.3 bar (240 - 280 PSI) clutch activated.
- 0 - 0.2 bar (0 - 3 PSI) clutch released.
• Filter bypass valve set at 1.5 - 1.7 bar (*) (22 - 24 PSI).
• Lube pressure (*) (port 33) 0.7 - 1.4 bar (10 - 20 PSI) at 54.9 l/min. (14.5 GPM) pump flow
(±1800 RPM).
• Safety valve: cracking pressure (*) 8.2 - 12.1 bar (120 - 175 PSI).
• Converter out pressure (*) (port 32) 1.7 bar min. (25 PSI) at 2000 RPM and max. 4.8 bar (70 PSI)
at no load governed speed.
(*) All pressures and flows to be measured with oil temperature of 82-93 °C (180-200 F).
(**) Refer to section 7 “Troubleshooting” for check port identification.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-5

008 910 64 BOMAG 195
3.5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• Solenoid (forward, reverse, 1st and 2nd).
Coil resistance:
- 12V: 9.79 Ω ±0.5 Ω.
- 24V: 39.3 Ω ±2 Ω.
• Speed sensor:
- Type: magneto resistive sensor.
- Sensing distance: 0 - 1.8 mm (0” - 0.07”).
- Sensor signal: generates a square current with a fixed amplitude changing between 7 and 14 mA.
3.6 HYDRAULIC COOLER AND FILTER LINE SPECIFICATIONS

• Minimum 19 mm (.75”) internal diameter for lines and fittings.
• Suitable for operation from ambient to 120 °C (248 F) continuous operating temperature.
• Must withstand 20 bar (290 PSI) continuous pressure and with 40 bar (580 PSI) intermittent surges.
• Conform SAE J1019 and SAE J517, 100RI.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 3-6

196 BOMAG 008 910 64
4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 OIL SPECIFICATION
4.1.1 Recommended lubricants

1. Caterpillar TO-4.
2. John Deere J20 C, D.
3. Military MIL-PRF-2104G.
4. Allison C-4.
5. Dexron* II Equivalent - See note below.
Note
DEXRON* II EQUIVALENT IS ACCEPTABLE; HOWEVER IT IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH TORQUE CONVERTERS OR
TRANSMISSIONS EQUIPPED WITH GRAPHITIC FRICTION MATERIAL CLUTCH PLATES.
Caution
DEXRON* III, ENGINE OIL OR GL-5 OILS ARE NOT RECOMMENDED.
PREFERRED OIL VISCOSITY

It is recommended that the highest viscosity monograde lubricant available be used for the anticipated
ambient temperature. Typically this will be a CAT TO-4 qualified lubricant. When large swings in ambient
temperature are probable, J20 C, D multigrades are recommended. Multigrade lubricants should be applied
at the lower viscosity rating for the prevailing ambient temperature, i.e. a 10W20 should be used where a
10W monograde is used. If a C-4 multigrade is used in stead of J20 lubricant it is recommended that the
viscosity span no more than 10 points, i.e. 10W20.
Caution
SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS ARE APPROVED IF QUALIFIED BY ONE OF THE ABOVE SPECIFICATIONS.
OIL VISCOSITY GUIDELINES APPLY, BUT SYNTHETIC MULTIGRADES MAY SPAN MORE THAN 10 POINTS.
FOR FIRE RESISTANT FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS PLEASE CONTACT SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS.
Recommended SAE J300 Viscosity Grade Based on Prevailing Ambient Temperature
SAE OW20
Dexron* II or equivalent.
SAE 10W
SAE 20
SAE 30
SAE 40
Celsius -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

Fahrenheit -40 -22 -4 14 32 50 68 88 104 122
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 4-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 197
Maintenance
SUMP PREHEATERS
Preheat the transmission fluid to the minimum temperature for the oil viscosity used before engine start up.
NORMAL OIL CHANGE INTERVAL

Drain and refill system every 1000 hours for average environmental and duty cycle conditions. Severe or
sustained high operating temperature or very dusty atmospheric conditions will result in accelerated
deterioration or contamination. Judgement must be used to determine the required change intervals for
extreme conditions.
EXTENDED OIL CHANGE INTERVAL

Extended oil service life may result when using synthetic fluids. Appropriate change intervals should be
determined for each transmission by measuring oil oxidation and wear metals, over time, to determine a
baseline. Wear metal analysis can provide useful information but a transmission should not be removed from
service based solely on this analysis.
FILTERS
Service oil filters element every 500 hours under normal environmental and duty cycle conditions.
*Dexron is a registered trademark of GENERAL MOTORS CORPORATION.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 4-2

198 BOMAG 008 910 64
Powershift transmission
Maintenance
6.1
4.2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
4.2.1 Daily
Check oil level daily with engine running at idle (600 RPM) and oil at 82 - 93 °C (180-200 F).
Maintain oil level at full mark.
4.2.2 Normal drain period

Normal drain period and oil filter element change are for average environment and duty cycle condition.
Severe or sustained high operating temperature or very dusty atmospheric conditions will cause accelerated
deterioration and contamination.
For extreme conditions judgement must be used to determine the required change intervals.
Every 500 hours
Change oil filter element.
Every 1000 hours
Drain and refill system as follows (Drain with oil at 65 - 93 °C (150 - 200 F)):
1. Drain transmission.
2. Remove and discard filter. Install new filter.
3. Refill transmission to FULL mark.
4. Run engine at 500 - 600 RPM to prime convertor and lines.
5. Recheck level with engine running at 500 - 600 RPM and add oil to bring level to LOW mark.
When oil temperature is hot 82.2 - 93.3 °C (180- 200 F) make final oil level check and adjust if
necessary to bring oil level to FULL mark.
Note
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT OIL FILTER BE CHANGED AFTER 100 HOURS OF OPERATION ON NEW,
REBUILT OR REPAIRED UNIT.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 4-3

008 910 64 BOMAG 199
Maintenance
4.3 SERVICING MACHINE AFTER COMPONENTS OVERHAUL

The transmission, torque converter, and its allied hydraulic system are important links in the driveline between
the engine and the wheels. The proper operation of either unit depends greatly on the condition and operation
of the other. Therefore, whenever repair or overhaul of one unit is performed, the balance of the system must
be considered before the job can be considered complete.
After the overhauled or repaired transmission has been installed in the machine, the oil cooler, and connecting
hydraulic system must be thoroughly cleaned. This can be accomplished in several manners and a degree of
judgement must be exercised as to the method employed.
The following are considered the minimum steps to be taken:

1. Drain entire system thoroughly.
2. Disconnect and clean all hydraulic lines. Where feasible hydraulic lines should be removed from machine
for cleaning.
3. Replace oil filter element.
4. The oil cooler must be thoroughly cleaned. The cooler should be “back flushed” with oil and compressed
air until all foreign material has been removed. Flushing in direction of normal oil flow will not adequately
clean the cooler. If necessary, cooler assembly should be removed from machine for cleaning, using oil,
compressed air, and steam cleaner for that purpose.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT USE FLUSHING COMPOUNDS FOR CLEANING PURPOSES.
5. Reassemble all components and use only type oil (See chapter 4.1.1 “Recommended lubricants”).
Fill the transmission through filler opening until fluid comes up to FULL mark on transmission dipstick.
• Remove filler plug and fill oil until FULL mark.
• Run engine two minutes at 500 - 600 RPM to prime torque convertor and hydraulic lines.
• Recheck level of fluid in transmission with engine running at idle (500 - 600 RPM).
• Add quantity necessary to bring fluid level to LOW mark on dipstick.
• Recheck with hot oil 82.2 - 93.3 °C (180 - 200 F).
• Adjust oil level to FULL mark on dipstick.
6. Recheck all drain plugs, lines, connections, etc.…, for leaks and tighten where necessary.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 4-4

200 BOMAG 008 910 64
5. INSTALLATION DETAILS
5.1 CONVERTER DRIVE COUPLING

Measure the “A” dimension (bolt circle diameter) and order drive plate kit listed below. Note three (3) kits
have two (2) intermediate drive plates and one (1) drive plate and weld nut assembly. Three (3) kits with
three intermediate drive plates.
(1) DRIVE PLATE AND

WELD NUT ASSEMBLY
A
A
BOLT CIRCLE DIA. BOLT CIRCLE DIA.
BACKING RING (2) INTERMEDIATE DRIVE PLATES BACKING RING (3) INTERMEDIATE DRIVE PLATES
“A” Dimension (Bolt circle diameter) “A” Dimension (Bolt circle diameter)
• 11.380” (288.900 mm) diameter • 11.380” (288.900 mm) diameter
Kit No. 814978. Kit No. 814979.
Kit No. 814977. Kit No. 814980.
Kit No. 814975. Kit No. 814981.
Each kit will include the following parts: Each kit will include the following parts:
• 2 Intermediate drive plates. • 3 Intermediate drive plates.
• 1 Drive plate and weld nut assembly. • 1 Backing ring.
• 1 Backing ring. • 6 Mounting screws.
• 6 Mounting screws. • 6 Lockwashers.
• 6 Lockwashers. • 1 Instruction sheet.
• 1 Instruction sheet.
Position drive plate and weld nut assembly on torque converter assembly with weld nuts toward converter.
Align intermediate drive plates and backing plate with holes in torque converter assembly.
Note
TWO DIMPLES 180° APART IN BACKING RING MUST BE OUT TOWARD ENGINE FLYWHEEL
(HOLLOW SIDE FACING TORQUE CONVERTER ASSEMBLY). INSTALL CAP SCREWS AND LOCKWASHERS.
TIGHTEN CAP SCREWS TORQUE 40 - 50 N.M. (30 - 37 LBF. FT.).
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 5-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 201
Installation details
5.2 TRANSMISSION TO ENGINE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Remove all burrs from flywheel mounting face and

nose pilot bore. Clean drive plate surface with
solvent. FLYWHEEL HOUSING MOUNT
DIAL INDICATOR
HERE
2. Check engine flywheel & housing for conformance
to standard SAE No. 3 per SAE J927 and J1033
ENGINE
tolerance specifications for pilot bore size, pilot
bore runout and mounting face flatness. Measure FLYWHEEL
and record engine crankshaft end play (Fig. 1). PILOT BORE
3. Install two 63,50 mm (2.50”) long transmission to

FLYWHEEL
flywheel housing guide studs in the engine
flywheel housing as shown. Rotate the engine
flywheel to align a drive plate mounting screw hole FIG. 1
with the flywheel housing access hole
(Fig. 2).
*4. Install a 101,60 mm (4.00”) long drive plate
locating stud .3750-24 fine thread in a drive plate
nut. Align the locating stud in the drive plate with FLYWHEEL HOUSING CONVERTER HOUSING
the flywheel drive plate mounting screw hole
positioned in step No. 3.
5. Rotate the transmission torque converter to align 4"STUD
the locating stud in the drive plate with the flywheel
drive plate mounting screw hole positioned in step
No. 3. Locate transmission on flywheel housing. 21/2"ALIGNING
STUDS
Aligning drive plate to flywheel and transmission FLYWHEEL

DRIVE
PLATE
to flywheel housing guide studs. Install
transmission to flywheel housing screws. Tighten
FIG. 2
screws to specified torque. Remove transmission
to engine guide studs. Install remaining screws
and tighten to specified torque.
*6. Remove drive plate locating stud. SPECIAL STUD, WASHER AND
SELF LOCK NUT FURNISHED
FLYWHEEL HOUSING BY ENGINE MANUFACTURER.
7. Install drive plate attaching screw and washer.
Snug screw but do not tighten. Some engine
flywheel housings have a hole located on the FLYWHEEL
flywheel housing circumference in line with the
drive plate screw access hole. A screwdriver or IMPELLER
COVER
pry bar used to hold the drive plate against the
flywheel will facilitate installation of the drive plate INTERMEDIATE
screws. Rotate the engine flywheel and install the DRIVE PLATES
remaining seven (7) flywheel to drive plate

attaching screws. Snug screws but do not tighten.
After all eight (8) screws are installed. FIG. 3 FIG.4
Torque each one 35 to 39 N.m. (26- 29ft.lbs.). This
will require tightening each screw and rotating the PLATES TO BE INSTALLED
WITH CONCAVE SIDE
engine flywheel until the full amount of eight (8) TOWARD ENGINE FLYWHEEL
screws have been tightened to specified torque.
8. Measure engine crankshaft end play after
transmission has been completely installed on
engine flywheel. This value must be within
0,025 mm (0.001”) of the end play recorded in FIG. 5
step No. 2.
* Does not apply to units having 3 intermediate drive
plates. See Fig.4.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 5-2

202 BOMAG 008 910 64
5.3 EXTERNAL PLUMBING
From transmission out to cooler
Transmission cooler
From cooler to
transmission in
Left side view
5.3.1 Optional: remote filter
To oil filter
From oil filter

OUT
IN
.3750-16 UNC - 2B THD

.88 [22.4] DEEP 3 HOLES
Optional remote filter
5.3.2 Cooler & filter lines specifications

• Minimum 19 mm (.75 inch) internal diameter for lines and fittings.
• Suitable for operation from ambient to 120 °C (248 F) continuous operating temperature.
• Must withstand 20 bar (290 psi) continuous pressure and with 40 bar (580 psi) intermittent surges.
• Conform SAE J1019 and SAE J517,100RI.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 5-3

008 910 64 BOMAG 203
5.4 SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
Position sign
On the sensor body there is a small plastic triangular position sign.

Make sure the position sign on the sensor points as shown below
Teeth rotation
in the direction of the movement of the gearteeth (Teeth rotation as shown).
1.65
(42.0)
Screw
Tighten to 5.9 - 7.4 lbf-ft
Position sign (8 - 10 Nm) Plug Screw
Tighten to 5.9 - 7.4 lbf-ft
"O"-ring Support "O"-ring (8 - 10 Nm)
Sensor installed Hole plugged
Sensor position on transmission

Turbine speed sensor location
Engine speed sensor location
FP
FC
3C
2P
2C
RC
RP
1P
Right side view
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 5-4

204 BOMAG 008 910 64
5.4 SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION (CONTINUED)
Position sign
Pin 2 ( - ) Pin 1 ( + )
The magneto resistive sensor generates a square wave current with a fixed amplitude changing
between 7 mA and 14 mA.
The sensor has an integrated AMP superseal 2 pin connector.
The two pins are numbered 1 and 2.
Following table shows the relation between wire colour, pin number and connection.
COLOUR PIN NUMBER FUNCTION CONNECTION

BROWN 1 Current input Hot wire
BLUE 2 Current output Ground wire
Note
THE SENSOR WIRES HAVE A POLARITY.
BE SURE TO CORRECTLY OBSERVE SENSOR POLARITIES, AS WRONG CONNECTIONS WILL DEACTIVATE THE SENSOR !
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 5-5

008 910 64 BOMAG 205
6. OPERATION OF THE TRANSMISSION
6.1 THE TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Basically the transmission is composed of five main assemblies:

1. The converter, pump drive section and pressure regulating valve.
2. The input shaft and directional clutches.
3. The range clutches.
4. The output section.
5. The transmission control valve.
FWD FWD 3RD
REV 2ND 1ST REV 2ND 1ST
2-SPEED TRANSMISSION 3-SPEED TRANSMISSION
NOTE
AS THERE IS LITTLE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE 2 AND 3-SPEED TRANSMISSION, WE WILL USE THE 3-SPEED
TRANSMISSION TO EXPLAIN ITS FUNCTION.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-1

206 BOMAG 008 910 64
Operation of the transmission
6.1.1 The converter, pump drive section and pressure regulating valve
Engine power is transmitted from the engine flywheel to the impeller through the impeller cover.
This element is the pump portion of the hydraulic torque converter and is the primary component which starts
the oil flowing to the other components which results in torque multiplication. This element can be compared
to a centrifugal pump, that picks up fluid at its centre and discharges it at the outer diameter.
The torque converter turbine is mounted opposite the impeller and is connected to the turbine shaft of the
torque converter. This element receives fluid at its outer diameter and discharges it at its centre.
The reaction member of the torque converter is located between and at the centre of the inner diameters of
the impeller and turbine elements. Its function is to take the fluid which is exhausting from the inner portion of
the turbine and change its direction to allow correct entry for recirculation into the impeller element.
This recirculation will make the converter to multiply torque.
The torque multiplication is function of the blading (impeller, turbine and reaction member) and the converter
output speed (turbine speed). The converter will multiply engine torque to its designed maximum multiplication
ratio when the turbine shaft is at zero RPM (stall).
Therefore we can say that as the turbine shaft is decreasing in speed, the torque multiplication is increasing.
The hydraulic pump is connected with the pump drive gear. This pump drive gear is driven by the impeller hub
gear. Since the impeller hub gear is connected with the impeller cover, the pump speed is in direct relation
with the engine speed.
Note
THE PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE AND SAFETY VALVE ARE MOUNTED BEHIND THE FILTER,
IN THE FILTER ADAPTER HOUSING.
FWD 3RD
REV 2ND 1ST
THE CONVERTER, PUMP DRIVE SECTION AND PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-2

008 910 64 BOMAG 207
6.1.2 The input shaft and directional clutches

The turbine shaft driven from the turbine transmits power to the forward or reverse clutch.
These clutches consist of a drum with internal splines and a bore to receive a hydraulic actuated piston.
The piston is oil tight by the use of sealing rings. The steel discs with external splines, and friction discs
with internal splines, are alternated until the required total is achieved.
A back-up plate is then inserted and secured with a retainer ring. A hub with outer diameter splines is
inserted into the splines of discs with teeth on the inner diameter. The discs and hub are free to increase in
speed or rotate in the opposite direction as long as no pressure is present in that specific clutch.
To engage the clutch, the solenoid will direct oil under pressure through tubes and passages to the selected
clutch shafts.
Oil sealing rings are located on the clutch shafts. These rings direct the oil through a drilled passage in the
shaft to the desired clutch.
Pressure of the oil forces the piston and discs against the back-up plate. The discs with splines on the outer
diameter clamping against discs with teeth on the inner diameter enables the drum and hub to be locked
together and allows them to drive as one unit.
When the clutch is released, a return spring will push the piston back and oil will drain back via the shift spool,
the bleed valve or holes in the clutch piston into the transmission sump.
These bleed valves will only allow quick escape of oil when the pressure to the piston is released.
As an option the engagement of the directional clutches can be modulated. This means that clutch pressure
is built up gradually. This will enable the unit to make forward, reverse shifts while the vehicle is still moving
and will allow smooth engagement of drive. The modulation is done hydraulically.
FWD 3RD
REV 2ND 1ST
THE INPUT SHAFT AND DIRECTIONAL CLUTCHES
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-3

208 BOMAG 008 910 64
6.1.3 The range clutches

Once a directional clutch is engaged power is transmitted to the range clutches (1st, 2nd or 3rd).
Operation and actuation of the range clutches is similar to the directional clutches.
The engagement of the range clutches are not modulated.
Note
THE 2-SPEED TRANSMISSION HAS NO 3RD CLUTCH.
6.1.4 The output section

With a range clutch engaged, power is finally transmitted to the output shaft.
Output rotation is opposite as the engine rotation when the forward clutch is engaged.
A front and/or rear axle disconnect is optional and is located on the output shaft. The drive to the front and/
or rear axle can be disconnected or connected by manual shifting.
FWD 3RD
FWD 3RD
REV 2ND 1ST

REV 2ND 1ST
THE RANGE CLUTCHES THE OUTPUT SECTION
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-4

008 910 64 BOMAG 209
6.1.5 The transmission controls (refer to hydraulic diagram)

The transmission is controlled by the control valve. The control valve assembly is mounted directly
on the side of the converter housing. The function of the control valve assembly is to direct oil under
pressure to the desired directional and speed clutch. A provision is made on certain models for inching
or declutch when the brakes are applied.
This is accomplished through use of a brake actuated valve.
For the 2-speed transmission, the control valve has 3 solenoids and 3 shift spools.
While for the 3-speed transmission, the control valve has 4 solenoids and 4 shift spools.
Operation of the valve

Forward can be selected by activating the forward solenoid. The forward solenoid will then allow pilot
pressure to move the forward shift spool. Due to this movement of the shift spool, the forward clutch is fed
with oil pressure.
When the reverse solenoid is activated, pilot pressure will move the reverse shift spool.
The reverse clutch will be fed with oil pressure.
The shift spools of forward and reverse are located opposite each other separated by a return spring.
This ensures that only one direction can be selected.
FP
FC
3C
2P
Forward solenoid
RC
2C Reverse solenoid
RP 2nd solenoid
1P 1st solenoid
FULL
ADD
THE TRANSMISSION CONTROLS
Note
THE 2-SPEED TRANSMISSION HAS NO 2ND SOLENOID.
Selection of range
2-speed transmission:
If the range solenoid 1st is activated, regulated pressure is fed through the shift spool to the 1st clutch.
If the range solenoid 1st is not activated, the regulated pressure is fed to the 2nd clutch.
3-speed transmission:
If the range solenoids 1st and 2nd are activated, regulated pressure is fed through the shift spools
to the 1st clutch.
If the range solenoid 2nd is activated, regulated pressure is fed through the shift spools to the 2nd clutch.
If no range solenoids are activated, the regulated pressure is fed to the 3rd clutch.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-5

210 BOMAG 008 910 64
6.2 ELECTRIC SOLENOID CONTROLS
6.2.1 2-Speed transmission
Transmission gear Activated solenoids Activated clutches

Forward 2 Forward Forward, 2nd
Forward 1 Forward, 1st Forward, 1st
Neutral 2 - 2nd
Neutral 1 1st 1st
Reverse 2 Reverse Reverse, 2nd
Reverse 1 Reverse, 1st Reverse, 1st
Transmission gear Activated solenoids Activated clutches

Forward 3 Forward Forward, 3rd
Forward 2 Forward, 2nd Forward, 2nd
Forward 1 Forward, 1st, 2nd Forward, 1st
Neutral 3 - 3rd
Neutral 2 2nd 2nd
Neutral 1 1st, 2nd 1st
Reverse 3 Reverse Reverse, 3rd

Reverse 2 Reverse, 2nd Reverse, 2nd
Reverse 1 Reverse, 1st, 2nd Reverse, 1st
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-6

008 910 64 BOMAG 211
6.3 POWERFLOWS, ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
6.3.1.1 Neutral and 2nd clutch engaged
NEUTRAL 2nd
(POWERFLOW)
FWD
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 1 ST
NEUTRAL 2nd (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-7

212 BOMAG 008 910 64
T20000 TRANSMISSION - HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM OPERATOR COMPARTMENT
2 SPEED TRANSMISSION INLINE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE : PRESSURE
X
T20000
GAUGE GAUGE CHECK PORT
NEUTRAL AND 2ND CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
12/99
6.3.1.1 Neutral and 2nd clutch engaged (continued)
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
1ST FORWARD MODULATION REVERSE MODULATION
BOMAG
SOLENOID SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
1P FP RP
bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP
(1 bar = 14.504 PSI) 2ND 1ST FORWARD REVERSE

CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
6-8
6.1
213
6.3.1.2 Forward 1st speed
FWD
FORWARD 1st
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 1 ST
FORWARD 1st (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-9

214 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
FORWARD AND 1ST CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.1.2 Forward 1st speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
12/99
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
1P FP RP
bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP

6-10
6.1
215
6.3.1.3 Forward 2nd speed
FWD
FORWARD 2nd
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 1 ST
FORWARD 2nd (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-11

216 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
FORWARD AND 2ND CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.1.3 Forward 2nd speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
1P FP RP
bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP

6-12
6.1
217
6.3.1.4 Reverse 1st speed
FWD
REVERSE 1st
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 1 ST
REVERSE 1st (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-13

218 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
REVERSE AND 1ST CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.1.4 Reverse 1st speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
1P FP RP
bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP

6-14
6.1
219
6.3.2.1 Neutral and 3rd clutch engaged
FWD 3RD
NEUTRAL 3rd
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
3RD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 2ND 1 ST
NEUTRAL 3rd (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-15

220 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
NEUTRAL AND 3RD CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
6.3.2.1 Neutral and 3rd clutch engaged (continued)
12/99
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
2ND 1ST FORWARD MODULATION REVERSE MODULATION
BOMAG
SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID VALVE SOLENOID VALVE
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
2P 1P FP RP
bar bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
3C 2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP
(1 bar = 14.504 PSI) 3RD 2ND 1ST FORWARD REVERSE

CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
6-16
6.1
221
6.3.2.2 Forward 1st speed
FWD 3RD
FORWARD 1st
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
3RD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 2ND 1 ST
FORWARD 1st (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-17

222 BOMAG 008 910 64
3SPEED TRANSMISSION INLINE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE : PRESSURE
X
T20000
FORWARD AND 1ST CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.2.2 Forward 1st speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
2P 1P FP RP
bar bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
3C 2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP
3RD 2ND 1ST FORWARD REVERSE

(1 bar = 14.504 PSI) CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
6-18
6.1
223
6.3.2.3 Forward 2nd speed
FWD 3RD
FORWARD 2nd
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
3RD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 2ND 1 ST
FORWARD 2nd (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-19

224 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
FORWARD AND 2ND CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.2.3 Forward 2nd speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
2P 1P FP RP
bar bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
3C 2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP
3RD 2ND 1ST FORWARD REVERSE

(1 bar = 14.504 PSI) CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH CLUTCH
6-20
6.1
225
6.3.2.4 Forward 3rd speed
FWD 3RD
FORWARD 3rd
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
3RD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 2ND 1 ST
FORWARD 3rd (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-21

226 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
FORWARD AND 3RD CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.2.4 Forward 3rd speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
2P 1P FP RP
bar bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
3C 2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP

6-22
6.1
227
6.3.2.5 Reverse 1st speed
FWD 3RD
REVERSE 1st
(POWERFLOW)
REV 2ND 1ST
FORWARD
3RD
SUPPLY
REVERSE 2ND
1ST
FWD REV 2ND 1 ST
REVERSE 1st (ACTIVATED SOLENOIDS AND SPOOLS)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-23

228 BOMAG 008 910 64
X
T20000
REVERSE AND 1ST CLUTCH ENGAGED bar
008 910 64
X : TEMPERATURE
°C CHECK PORT
2&3
SAFETY VALVE
8.2 - 12.1 BAR
CRACKING PRESSURE
INLINE
CI CI CO CO
bar °C °C bar
LUBRICATION
HOSE COOLER HOSE

TORQUE
CONVERTER
6.3.2.5 Reverse 1st speed (continued)
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
VALVE
16.5 - 19.3 bar
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL
12/99
BOMAG
BY-PASS FILTER
VALVE
1.5 - 1.7 bar
2P 1P FP RP
bar bar bar bar
PUMP
AIR
BREATHER
SCREEN
3C 2C 1C FC RC
bar bar bar bar bar
OIL SUMP

6-24
6.1
229
6.4 GEAR AND CLUTCH LAY-OUT
Forward
1st, 2nd and reverse
Reverse idler
Output section
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-25

230 BOMAG 008 910 64
Forward
1st, 2nd and reverse
Reverse idler
3rd
Output section
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 6-26

008 910 64 BOMAG 231
7. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE T20000 TRANSMISSION
The following information is presented as an aid to isolating and determining the specific problem area in a
transmission that is not functioning correctly.
When troubleshooting a “transmission” problem, it should be kept in mind that the transmission is only the
central unit of a group of related powertrain components. Proper operation of the transmission depends on
the condition and correct functioning of the other components of the group. Therefore, to properly diagnose
a suspected problem in the transmission, it is necessary to consider the transmission fluid, charging pump,
torque converter, transmission assembly, oil cooler, filter, connecting lines, and controls, including the engine,
as a complete system.
By analysing the principles of operation together with the information in this section, it should be possible to
identify and correct any malfunction which may occur in the system.
7.1 T20000 TRANSMISSION

T20000 (power shift with torque converter transmission) troubles fall into three general categories:
1. Mechanical problems.
2. Hydraulic problems.
3. Electrical problems.
In addition to the mechanical and electrical components, all of which must be in the proper condition and
functioning correctly, the correct functioning of the hydraulic circuit is most important. Transmission fluid is
the “life blood” of the transmission. It must be supplied in an adequate quantity and delivered to the system
at the correct pressures to ensure converter operation, to engage and hold the clutches from slipping, and to
cool and lubricate the working components.
7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
7.2.1 Stall Test

A stall test to identifies transmission, converter, or engine problems.
Use following procedure:
1. Put the vehicle against a solid barrier, such as a wall, and/or apply the parking brake and block the
wheels.
2. Put the directional control lever in FORWARD (or REVERSE, as applicable).
3. Select the highest speed.
With the engine running, slowly increase engine speed to approximately one-half throttle and hold until
transmission (converter outlet) oil temperature reaches the operating range.
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE THE CONVERTER AT STALL CONDITION LONGER THAN 30 SECONDS AT ONE TIME, SHIFT TO NEUTRAL
FOR 15 SECONDS AND REPEAT THE PROCEDURE UNTIL DESIRED TEMPERATURE IS REACHED.
EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE 120 °C (250 F) MAXIMUM WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO TRANSMISSION CLUTCHES, FLUID,
CONVERTER, AND SEALS.
232 T20000 2&3 INLINE BOMAG

12/99 7-164
008 910
Troubleshooting guide
7.2.2 Transmission pressure checks

Transmission problems can be isolated by the use of pressure tests. When the stall test indicates slipping
clutches, then measure clutch pack pressure to determine if the slippage is due to low pressure or clutch
plate friction material failure.
In addition, converter charging pressure and transmission lubrication pressure can also be measured.
7.2.3 Mechanical and electrical checks

Prior to checking any part of the system for hydraulic function (pressure testing), the following mechanical
and electrical checks should be made:
• Check the parking brake and inching pedal for correct adjustment.
• Be sure all lever linkage is properly connected and adjusted in each segment and at all connecting points.
• The controls are actuated electrically. Check the wiring and electrical components.
• Be sure that all components of the cooling system are in good condition and operating correctly.
The radiator must be clean to maintain the proper cooling and operating temperatures for the engine and
transmission. Air clean the radiator, if necessary.
• The engine must be operating correctly. Be sure that it is correctly tuned and adjusted to the correct idle
and maximum no-load governed speed specifications.
7.2.4 Hydraulic checks

Also, before checking the transmission clutches, torque converter, charging pump, and hydraulic circuit for
pressure and rate of oil flow, it is important to make the following transmission fluid check:
Check oil level in the transmission. The transmission fluid must be at the correct (full level).
All clutches and the converter and its fluid circuit lines must be fully charged (filled) at all times.
Note
THE TRANSMISSION FLUID MUST BE AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF 82 - 93 °C (180 - 200 F) TO OBTAIN
CORRECT FLUID LEVEL AND PRESSURE READINGS.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO MAKE THESE CHECKS WITH COLD OIL.
To raise the oil temperature to this specification it is necessary to either operate (work) the vehicle or run the
engine with converter at “stall” (Refer to 7.2.1 “Stall test”).
CAUTION
BE CAREFUL THAT THE VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE UNEXPECTEDLY WHEN OPERATING THE ENGINE AND
CONVERTER AT STALL RPM.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 7-2 233
7.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Refer to the following troubleshooting guide for the diagnosis of typical transmission troubles.
7.3.1 Low clutch pressure
Cause Remedy
1. Low oil level. 1. Fill to proper level.
2. Clutch pressure regulating valve stuck open. 2. Clean valve spool and housing.
3. Faulty charging pump. 3. Replace pump.
4. Broken or worn clutch shaft or piston sealing rings. 4. Replace sealing rings.
5. Clutch piston bleed valve stuck open. 5. Clean bleed valves thoroughly.
7.3.2 Low charging pump output
Cause Remedy
2. Suction screen plugged. 2. Clean suction pump.
3. Defective charging pump. 3. Replace pump.
7.3.3 Overheating
Cause Remedy
1. Worn oil sealing rings. 1. Remove, disassemble, and rebuild converter
assembly.
2. Worn charging pump. 2. Replace charging pump.
4. Dirty oil cooler. 4. Clean cooler.
5. Restriction in cooler lines. 5. Change cooler lines.
7.3.4 Noisy converter
Cause Remedy
1. Worn charging pump. 1. Replace charging pump.
2. Worn or damaged bearings. 2. A complete disassembly will be necessary to
determine which bearing is faulty.
7.3.5 Lack of power
Cause Remedy
1. Low engine RPM at converter stall. 1. Tune engine check governor.
2. See “Overheating” and make same checks. 2. Make corrections as explained in “Overheating”.

12/99 7-364
008 910
7.4 CHECK POINTS
BREATHER
PORT 33
CHECK PORT-LUBE PRESSURE
.5625-18UNF-2B
SAE "O"-RING PORT
FRONT VIEW
LIFTING HOLE
.7500-10 UNC - 3B THD DEEP 1.12
PORT 71
CHECK PORT - CONVERTER OUT TEMPERATURE
1/2 - 14 NPTF
PORT 32
CHECK PORT - CONVERTER OUT PRESSURE
1/8 - 27 NPTF
MAGNET DRAIN PLUG

3/4 - 14 NPTF THD
REAR VIEW
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 7-4 235
7.4 CHECK POINTS (CONTINUED)
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR PROVISION

PUMP DRIVER GEAR BREATHER
TURBINE SPEED SENSOR PROVISION

FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM GEAR
PORT 31
DIPSTICK CLUTCH PRESSURE
FP .5625 - 18UNF - 2B
SAE "O" - RING PORT
FC
PORT 45 3C
CHECK PORT - FORWARD CLUTCH PRESSURE 2P
.5625 - 18UNF - 2B 2C
SAE "O" - RING PORT RC PORT 43

RP CHECK PORT - 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
1/8-27 NPTF
PORT 43
FULL
1P
PORT 42
CHECK PORT - 3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
CHECK PORT - 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
ADD
.5625 - 18UNF - 2B
1/8-27 NPTF
SAE "O" - RING PORT
PORT 41 PORT 46
CHECK PORT - 1ST CLUTCH PRESSURE CHECK PORT - REVERSE CLUTCH PRESSURE
.5625 - 18UNF - 2B 1/8-27 NPTF
SAE "O" - RING PORT
MOUNTING HOLES
.7500 - 10 NC - 3B THD
31.8 mm (1.25") DEEP
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
PORT 11
TO COOLER
1.0625 - 12 UN - 2B
SAE "O" - RING PORT
PORT 12
FROM COOLER
1.0625 - 12 UN - 2B
SAE "O" - RING PORT
MOUNTING HOLES
.7500 - 10 NC - 3B THD
31.8 mm (1.25") DEEP
LEFT SIDE VIEW

12/99 7-564
008 910
7.4 CHECK POINTS (CONTINUED)
PORT 31
CLUTCH PRESSURE DIPSTICK
.5625 - 18 UNF - 2B
SAE "O" - RING PORT
BREATHER
TOP VIEW
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 7-6 237
7.5 SPEED SENSOR - STATIC STANDALONE TEST
In order to be able to sense the currents, a series resistor of e.g. 200 Ohms must be used. This resistor is
integrated in the controller, but when the sensor is to be tested, it must be connected externally.
The idea is to connect the sensor to an external power source and measure the DC voltage across the series
resistor.
The voltage reading should be either 1.2V-1.6V (for the 7mA ± 1mA current level) or 2.6-3.0V
(for the 14mA ± 1mA current level)
If the teeth can be moved slowly, distinct toggling between the two levels should be noticed.

12/99 7-764
008 910
8. SECTIONAL VIEWS AND PARTS IDENTIFICATION
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 239
GROUP - CONVERTER HOUSING
18
16 13
17
4
1 11
12
14 10
15
9
3
15
14
15
14
8
7
8-2 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

240 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - CONVERTER HOUSING
Item Description Quantity
1 Housing - Converter 1
2 Tube - Lube 1
3 Sleeve - Converter housing 1
4 Plug - Pipe 1
5 Plug - Pipe 1
6 Gasket - Converter housing to to transmission case 1
7 Screw - Converter housing to transmission case 16
8 Lockwasher - Converter housing to transmission case screw 16
9 Pin - Converter housing to transmission case dowel 1
10 Clip 1
11 Screw - Clip 1
12 Lockwasher - Clip screw 1
13 Air - Breather 1
14 Plug 3
15 “O”-ring 3
16 Plug - Speed sensor port 1
17 “O”-ring - Speed sensor 1
18 Screw - Speed sensor 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-3

008 910 64 BOMAG 241
GROUP - TRANSMISSION CASE AND REAR COVER
28
29
25
19
14 20
26
21
15
33 5 16
30
32 31 27
10 10 17 18
11 11 20
23
22
5
21
24 9
4
8
13
1 12
7
21
6
2
8-4 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

242 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP -TRANSMISSION CASE AND REAR COVER
1 Case - Transmission 1
2 Assembly - Suction tube 1
3 “O”-ring - Suction tube assembly 1
4 Tube - Low speed clutch pressure 1
5 Sleeve - Tube 2
6 Tube - Lube 1
7 Sleeve - Tube 1
8 Oil - Baffle 1
9 Seal - Oil baffle 2
10 Plug 2
11 “O”-ring 2
12 Plug 1
13 “O”-ring 1
14 Cover - Rear 1
15 Plug 1
16 “O”-ring 1
17 Pin - Transmission case to rear cover dowel 2
18 Screw - Rear cover to transmission case 6
19 Screw - Rear cover to transmission case 9
20 Lockwasher - Rear cover to transmission case screw 15
21 “O”-ring - Clutch pressure tube 3
22 “O”-ring - Clutch pressure 2
23 Gasket - Rear cover 1
24 Plug - Magnetic drain 2
25 Dipstick 1
26 Assembly - Dipstick tube 1
27 Cap - Rear bearing 1
28 Plug 1
29 “O”-ring 1
30 Plug - Speed sensor port 1
31 “O”-ring - Speed sensor 1
32 Screw - Speed sensor 1
33 Plug - Dipstick hole 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-5

008 910 64 BOMAG 243
GROUP - TURBINE SHAFT
2
1
3
5
8 6
4 10
13
11
12
14
8-6 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

244 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - TURBINE SHAFT
1 Assembly - Turbine shaft & hub 1

2 Ring - Retaining 1
3 Bearing - Ball 1
4 Snap ring - Bearing 1
5 Washer - Bearing support 1
6 Ring - Bearing retaining 1
7 Ring - Piston 1
8 Support - Stator 1
9 Screw - Stator support 6
10 Ring - Piston 1
11 Baffle - Oil 1
12 Seal - Oil baffle 1
13 Ring - Oil baffle seal 1
14 Ring - Oil baffle retaining 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-7

008 910 64 BOMAG 245
GROUP - DRIVE PLATE
5
4
8-8 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

246 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - DRIVE PLATE
1 Assembly - Drive plate 1

2 Drive - Plate 2
3 Ring - Drive plate backing 1
4 Screw - Drive plate mounting 6
5 Lockwasher - Drive plate mounting 6
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-9

008 910 64 BOMAG 247
GROUP - TORQUE CONVERTER
2
1 3
7
5
4
6
8-10 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

248 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - TORQUE CONVERTER
1 Assembly - Torque converter 1

2 Bearing - Impeller hub gear 1
3 Ring - External snap 1
4 Plug - Torque converter 1
5 “O”-ring - Torque converter plug 1
6 Ring - Snap 1
7 Ring - Turbine retaining 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-11

008 910 64 BOMAG 249
GROUP - AUXILIARY PUMP DRIVE
9
10
7
8 9
2 10
1
4
5
8-12 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

250 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - AUXILIARY PUMP DRIVE
1 Support - Pump drive bearing 1

2 Screw - Bearing support 1
3 Pin - Bearing support 1
4 Bearing - Ball 1
5 Ring - Drive gear bearing retaining 1
6 Gear - Auxiliary pump drive 1
7 Cover - Pump mounting permanent 1
8 Gasket - Shipping cover 1
9 Screw - Pump mounting permanent cover 2
10 Lockwasher - Pump cover screw 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-13

008 910 64 BOMAG 251
GROUP - PUMP DRIVE
9
3
6 8
1
4
5
12
11
10
11
12
8-14 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

252 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - PUMP DRIVE
1 Support - Pump drive bearing 1

2 Pin - Bearing support 1
3 Screw - Bearing support 1
4 Bearing - Ball 1
5 Ring - Drive gear bearing retaining 1
6 Gear - Charging pump drive 1
7 Gear - Pump drive idler 1
8 Shaft - Idler gear stub 1
9 Ball - Idler shaft lock 1
10 Bearing - Ball 1
11 Ring - Idler gear bearing location 2
12 Ring - Idler gear bearing retaining 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-15

008 910 64 BOMAG 253
GROUP - FORWARD SHAFT
2 4
6
5
8
9
7
10
11
15
17
12
16
14
13
8-16 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

254 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - FORWARD SHAFT
1 Assembly - Forward shaft, drum and plug 1

2 Piston - Clutch 1
3 Seal - Clutch piston (Outer) 1
4 Seal - Clutch piston (Inner) 1
5 Disc - Clutch (Inner) 8
6 Disc - Clutch (Outer) 8
7 Spacer - Piston return spring 1
8 Plate - Clutch disk backing 1
9 Snap ring - Backing plate 1
10 Assembly - Disc spring 1
11 Snap ring - Spring retaining 1
12 Sleeve - Piston ring 1
13 Spring - Piston ring expander 4
14 Ring - Piston 4
15 Bearing - Forward shaft front 1
16 Snap ring 1
17 Bearing - Forward shaft rear 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-17

008 910 64 BOMAG 255
GROUP - REVERSE AND 2ND SHAFT
26
19 12
31 21
30
21 17 5
22 20
24 6 7
23
1
25
2 4
10
8
13
14
27
28
29
18
16
15
14
13
9
11
8-18 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

256 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - REVERSE AND 2ND SHAFT
1 Assembly - Reverse, 2nd shaft & drum 1

2 Piston - Clutch 1
5 Piston - Clutch 1
12 Spacer - Piston return spring 1
13 Plate - Clutch disc backing 2
15 Spring - Piston return 1
16 Retainer - Spring 1
17 Assembly - Disc spring 1
19 Bearing - Clutch driven gear 1
20 Bearing - Clutch driven gear 1
21 Ring - Reverse clutch gear bearing 2
22 Bearing - Ball 1
23 Ring - Front bearing retaining 1
24 Snap ring - Front bearing 1
25 Ring - Piston 3
27 Hub - 2nd clutch 1
28 Ring - 2nd clutch disc hub retaining 1
29 Bearing - Needle 1
30 Spacer - Reverse clutch gear 1
31 Gear - Reverse clutch 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-19

008 910 64 BOMAG 257
GROUP - REVERSE IDLER
4
5
2
6
3
8-20 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

258 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - REVERSE IDLER
1 Shaft - Reverse idler 1

2 Assembly - Reverse idler bearing 1
3 Washer 1
4 Nut - Bearing retaining 1
5 Washer - Bearing retaining 1
6 Lockball - Idler shaft 1
7 Gear - Reverse idler 1
8 “O”-ring - Idler shaft 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-21

008 910 64 BOMAG 259
GROUP - LOW SPEED SHAFT
11
13
27 12
14
14 18
12
17
16
2 4
6
5
7
8
9 25
10
24
23
15 26
21
20 22
19
8-22 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

260 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - LOW SPEED SHAFT
1 Assembly - Low shaft drum 1

2 Piston - Clutch 1
8 Ring - Backing plate retaining 1
11 Snap ring - Spring retainer 1
12 Bearing - Low speed gear 2
13 Ring - Low speed gear bearing retainer 1
14 Ring - Low speed gear bearing locating 2
15 Ring - Low shaft piston 1
16 Bearing - Low speed clutch shaft front 1
17 Spacer - Low speed shaft front bearing 1
18 Spacer - Low speed gear 1
19 Bearing - Low speed shaft rear 1
20 Washer - Rear bearing support 1
21 Ring - Rear bearing retainer 1
22 Stud - Bearing cap 4
23 Lockwasher - Bearing cap stud 4
24 Nut - Bearing cap stud 4
25 “O”-ring - Rear bearing cap 1
26 “O”-ring - Rear bearing cap 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-23

008 910 64 BOMAG 261
GROUP - OUTPUT AND 3RD SHAFT (3-SPEED)
23 26
22
25
18 28 24
16 20
17
21
15 19
6 7
5
8 9
10
11
12
14
2
27
3
13
4
8-24 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

262 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - OUTPUT AND 3RD SHAFT (3-SPEED)
1 Assembly - Output & 3rd clutch shaft and drum 1

2 Ring - 3rd clutch gear and hub retaining 1
3 Ring - Output shaft piston 1
4 Bearing - Output & 3rd shaft pilot 1
5 Piston - Clutch 1
14 Snap ring - Spring retainer 1
15 Bearing - Outer shaft rear 1
16 Cap - Output shaft rear bearing 1
17 “O”-ring - Output shaft bearing cap 1
18 “O”-ring - Bearing cap 1
19 Spacer - Bearing to flange 1
20 Seal - Rear bearing cap oil 1
21 Stud - Rear bearing stud 1
22 Lockwasher - Rear bearing cap stud 1
23 Nut - Rear bearing cap stud 1
24 “O”-ring - Flange 1
25 Washer - Flange 1
26 Nut - Flange 1
27 Gear - 3rd clutch 1
28 Flange - Output shaft 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-25

008 910 64 BOMAG 263
GROUP - OUTPUT SHAFT (2-SPEED)
13
10
9 12
15
11
7
5
8 4
3
14 2
8-26 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

264 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - OUTPUT SHAFT (2-SPEED)
1 Shaft - Output 1
2 Ring - 3rd gear and hub retainer 1
3 Bearing - Output shaft pilot 1
4 Bearing - Output shaft rear 1
5 Cap - Output shaft rear bearing 1
6 Gasket - Bearing cap 1
7 Seal - Rear bearing cap oil 1
8 Stud - Rear bearing cap 4
9 Lockwasher - Rear bearing cap oil 4
10 Nut - Rear bearing cap stud 4
11 “O”-ring - Flange 1
12 Washer - Flange 1
13 Nut - Flange 1
14 Gear - Forward shaft 1
15 Flange - Output shaft 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-27

008 910 64 BOMAG 265
GROUP - CHARGING PUMP & FILTER
3 2
4
8-28 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

266 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - CHARGING PUMP & FILTER
1 Pump - Charging 1
2 Assembly - Hydraulic spin on filter 1
3 Gasket - Pump assembly to converter housing 1
4 “O”-ring 1
5 Screw - Pump mounting 5
6 Lockwasher - Pump mounting screw 5
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-29

008 910 64 BOMAG 267
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE (MECHANICAL)
1
6
3
2
8-30 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

268 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE (MECHANICAL)
1 Assembly - Control valve 1

2 Spring - Detent 2
3 Ball - Detent 2
4 Gasket - Control valve 1
5 Screw - Control valve mounting 9
6 Lockwasher - Control valve mounting screw 9
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-31

008 910 64 BOMAG 269
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL)
7 2
11
11 1
12
12
13
9
12 10
13
8-32 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

270 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL)
1 Housing - Control valve 1

2 Spool - Declutch 1
3 Stop - Spool 1
4 Spring - Spool 1
5 Plug 1
6 Spool - Forward and reverse 1
7 Spool - Speed selector 1
8 Plug 1
9 Switch - Start 1
10 Pin 1
11 Oil - Seal 2
12 Pipe plug 4
13 Stop - Spool 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-33

008 910 64 BOMAG 271
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE MOUNTING
3
4
8-34 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

272 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE MOUNTING
1 Assembly - Electric control valve 1

2 Gasket - Control valve to front cover 1
3 Screw - Valve to converter housing 9
4 Lockwasher - Valve to converter housing screw 9
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-35

008 910 64 BOMAG 273
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
7
8
22
13
23
7
6
8 20
4 9
10
11
21
5
5
12
19
1
15
14
18
16
26
25
32
27
31
24
30
28
18
30 17
29
8-36 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

274 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
1 Housing control valve 1

2 Cover - Control valve 1
3 Gasket - Control valve cover 1
4 Spool - Forward and reverse shift 2
5 Spring 2
6 Spool - Range (3rd) 1
7 Valve housing plug 2
8 Valve housing plug “O”-ring 2
9 Spool stop 1
10 Pin 1
11 Plug stop 1
12 Spool - Range (1st and 2nd) 1
13 Spring 1
14 Pipe plug 8
15 Plug 1
16 Screw 1
17 Screw 2
18 Lockwasher 3
19 Stop - Spool 1
20 Forward and reverse declutching spool 1
21 Spring - Declutch 1
22 Plug 1
23 “O”-ring - Plug 1
24 Cartridge - Ball valve 4
25 “O”-ring - Cartridge 4
28 Coil 12V 4
29 Nut - Solenoid 4
30 “O”-ring 8
31 Cover - Solenoid 1
32 Spacer - Cover 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 8-37

008 910 64 BOMAG 275
9. ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

12/99 9-164
008 910
Assembly instructions
9. ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS (CONTINUED)
10
9 5
FWD 3RD
3 7
2 5
11.2 [.44]
7
6
5
5
9 REV 2ND 1ST
4
8
5
4 2
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 9-2 277

All lead in chamfers for oil seals, piston rings, and “O”-rings must be smooth and free from burrs.
Inspect at assembly.
Lubricate all piston ring grooves and “O”-rings with oil before assembly.
Apply a thin coating of grease between seal lips on lip type seals prior to assembly.
Use only precoated pipe plugs. On uncoated pipe plugs apply a light coat of Loctite no. 592.
After assembly of parts using Loctite, there must not be any free or excess material
which might enter the oil circuit.
Apply a light coat of Loctite no. 262 or no. 270 to all thru hole stud holes.
1 Tighten oil filter to 20-25 lbf.ft [27-34 N.m].
2 Fwd. and rev. with standard piston & low clutch. 8 Outer steel discs and 8 inner friction discs.
Insert one (1) Steel disc. Insert one (1) friction disc. Alternate steel and friction discs until proper
amount of discs are installed. First disc next to the piston is steel, last disc installed is friction.
3 Snap ring is to be assembled with sharp edges to front.
4 Must be loose internal fit bearing with a no. 3 etched on the bearing.
5 Seals must be sized prior to assembly.
6 Two clutches (2nd & 3rd). 6 Outer steel discs and 6 inner friction discs.
Start with outer steel disc alternate friction and steel.
7 Tighten to 200 - 250 lbf.ft [271.2 - 339.0 N.m].
8 Shielded bearing, be sure that bearing shield is on the outside.
9 Forward and reverse clutch springs concave side of first belleville spring to be placed against clutch
piston. Remaining four springs of each clutch to be stacked alternatly reversed as shown.
10 Stator support screw assembly:
1. Clean stator support mounting surface and tapped holes with solvent. Dry thoroughly.
Being certain tapped holes are clean and dry.
2. Install 6 special stator support screws. Tighten screws to 12 - 16 lbf.ft [16.3 - 21.7 N.m] torque.

12/99 9-364
008 910
Note
ASSEMBLY OF STATOR SUPPORT TO CONVERTER HOUSING MUST BE COMPLETED WITHIN A 15 MINUTE PERIOD FROM
START OF SCREW INSTALLATION. THE SPECIAL SCREW IS TO BE USED FOR ONE INSTALLATION ONLY. IF SCREW IS
REMOVED FOR ANY REASON IT MUST BE REPLACED. THE LOCTITE LEFT IN THE HOLES MUST BE REMOVED WITH THE
PROPER TAP AND CLEANED WITH SOLVENT. DRY HOLE THOROUGHLY AND USE A NEW SCREW FOR REINSTALLATION.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 9-4 279
Disassembly and reassembly T20000 Inline transmission
280 T20000 2 & 3 INLINE BOMAG

12/99 10-164
008 910
Disassembly T20000 Inline transmission
Figure 1 Figure 4
Side view of the T20000 inline 2- or 3-speed Remove valve and pump assembly.
transmission. The transmission being disassembled
is the 3-speed version.
Figure 2 Figure 5
It is recommended a small pan be used Remove drive plate mounting screws and washers.
to catch the oil left in the filter element.
Remove filter element.
Figure 3 Figure 6
Remove pressure regulating valve and charging Remove drive plate and backing ring.
pump bolts.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-2 281
Figure 7 Figure 10
Remove impeller cover bore plug retainer ring. Remove torque converter assembly.
Figure 8 Figure 11
Using two small screw drivers as shown, Remove turbine locating ring.
remove plug.
Figure 9 Figure 12
Through bore plug hole, remove turbine Using slots provided in converter housing.
retaining ring. Remove oil baffle retaining ring.

12/99 10-364
008 910
Figure 13 Figure 16
Baffle and sealing ring removed. Remove pump drive idler gear locating ring.
Figure 14 Figure 17
Remove pump drive idler gear retaining ring. From the rear, remove pump hole cover, screws,
lockwashers and gasket.
Figure 15 Figure 18
Remove idler gear and bearing assembly. Remove auxiliary pump drive bearing support
screws. See figure 256.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-4 283
Figure 19 Figure 22
Remove auxiliary pump drive gear. Remove control cover bolts and lockwashers.
Figure 20 Figure 23
From the rear through the pump drive hole, Remove control valve assembly.
remove pump drive bearing support screw. Use caution as not to lose detent springs and balls.
See figure 259. Some units will have an electrical control valve.
Figure 21 Figure 24
From the front, tap pump drive gear Remove modulator valve and gasket if used.
and bearing support from housing.

12/99 10-564
008 910
Figure 25 Figure 28
Remove all bolts but one securing transmission Before removing parking brake (if used),
to converter housing. see to the parking brake instructions.
See section 11: “Options”.
Figure 26 Figure 29
Support converter housing with a chain hoist. Remove brake disc mounting screws
Remove remaining bolt. and lockwashers.
Figure 27 Figure 30
Separate converter housing from Brake disc removed.
transmission case assembly.
NOTE: Reverse and 2nd clutch
will remain in converter housing.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-6 285
Figure 31 Figure 34
Remove output shaft flange nut, washer, Remove output shaft bearing cap stud nuts
“O”-ring and flange. and lockwashers.
Figure 32 Figure 35
Remove brake adaptor mounting bolts. Remove output shaft bearing cap and “O”-rings.
Figure 33 Figure 36
Brake adaptor removed. Remove output shaft rear bearing spacer.

12/99 10-764
008 910
Figure 37 Figure 40
Remove low clutch shaft bearing cap nuts Remove low clutch shaft rear bearing locating ring.
and lockwashers.
Figure 38 Figure 41
Low clutch shaft bearing cap removed. Remove rear cover screws and lockwashers.
Figure 39 Figure 42
Remove output shaft rear bearing locating ring. Using pry slots provided, pry cover from
transmission housing, tapping on low clutch
and output shaft to allow cover to be removed
without shaft binding.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-8 287
Figure 43 Figure 46
Rear cover removed, showing low clutch (bottom) Remove low clutch shaft rear bearing.
and output shaft (top).
Figure 44 Figure 47
Remove low clutch shaft rear bearing retainer ring. Remove output shaft and 3rd speed clutch
assembly from housing.
NOTE: The 2-speed transmission would not have
a clutch on the shaft.
Figure 45 Figure 48
Remove low clutch shaft rear bearing spacer Remove the output shaft pilot bearing.
and retainer ring.

12/99 10-964
008 910
Figure 49 Figure 52
Remove 3rd clutch gear retainer ring. Remove 2nd clutch disc hub.
Figure 50 Figure 53
Remove gear and 3rd speed clutch hub. Tap low clutch and gear assembly from housing.
NOTE: 2-Speed would be gear only.
Figure 51 Figure 54
Remove 2nd clutch disc hub retainer ring Low clutch assembly removed.
and pilot bearing.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-10 289
Figure 55 Figure 58
Tap forward clutch from housing. Remove forward clutch sealing ring sleeve
retainer ring.
Figure 56 Figure 59
Forward clutch assembly removed. Tap sealing ring sleeve from housing.
Figure 57 Figure 60
Remove oil baffle and baffle seals. Sleeve removed.

12/99 008 10-11
910 64
Figure 61
Remove suction tube and “O”-ring from housing.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-12 291
Disassembly of converter housing
Figure 62 Figure 65
Using spreading type snap ring pliers, spread ears Remove idler shaft bearing retainer nut, lockplate.
on the reverse front bearing retaining ring.
Holding snap ring open pry reverse and 2nd clutch
assembly from converter housing.
Figure 63 Figure 66
Straighten tang on reverse idler bearing Remove idler gear and outer taper bearing
retainer nut lockplate. from idler shaft.
Figure 64 Figure 67
Remove idler shaft bearing retainer nut. Remove idler gear bearing spacer.
Use TG 1304-54. See section 12: “Service tools”
(page 12-1).

12/99 008 10-13
910 64
Figure 68 Figure 71
Remove idler gear inner taper bearing. Tap idler shaft from converter housing.
Figure 69 Figure 72
Remove idler gear inner taper bearing spacer. Using spreader type pliers spread ears
on the turbine shaft bearing snap ring.
Tap turbine shaft and baring from converter housing.
Figure 70 Figure 73
Remove idler shaft lock ball. Remove stator support screws.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-14 293
Figure 74 Figure 77
Tap stator support from converter housing. Remove support bearing retaining ring.
Figure 75 Figure 78
Remove oil sealing ring sleeve retainer and washer. Remove bearing from support.
Remove sleeve lock. Remove support oil seal ring.
Figure 76 Figure 79
Using a sleeve puller like the one shown, Remove turbine shaft oil sealing ring.
remove sleeve.

12/99 008 10-15
910 64
Figure 80
Remove turbine shaft bearing retaining ring
and washer.
Figure 81
Remove turbine shaft bearing.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-16 295
Disassembly of low (1st) clutch
Figure 82 Figure 85
Remove low gear and hub, low shaft front bearing, Remove end plate.
bearing spacer and clutch gear outer bearing.
Figure 83 Figure 86
Remove low speed gear bearing spacer. Turn clutch over. Remove inner and outer clutch
discs.Do not mix low clutch friction discs with friction
discs in other clutches.
Figure 84 Figure 87
Remove end plate retainer ring. Remove low speed gear inner bearing.

12/99 008 10-17
910 64
Disassembly of low (1st) clutch
Figure 88 Figure 91
Remove inner bearing retainer ring. Turn clutch over and tap clutch shaft on a block
of wood to remove clutch piston.
Figure 89 Figure 92
Remove clutch piston return spring. A 1-1/2 x 1 sleeve with a portion Remove clutch shaft piston ring.
removed is recommended for removing the clutch piston spring, washer and
retainer ring. Sleeve shown is a common pipe with a 1-1/1 x (39,0 x 26,0 mm)
opening. The pipe is 6 x 3-1/4 x 2- 3/4 (155,0 x 85,0 x 78,0 mm).
Compress spring retainer washer. Through opening remove spring retainer
snap ring. Release tension on spring retainer.
Figure 90
Remove spring retainer ring, spring retainer and spring.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-18 297
Reassembly of low (1st) clutch
Figure 93 Figure 96
Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. The bleed valve Position piston return spring,
in the clutch drum must be clean and free of any foreign material.
Install clutch piston outer seal ring. NOTE: Ring must be sized before spring retainer and snap ring in clutch drum.
installing in clutch drum. Sizing is best accomplished by rotating
clutch while holding a round object against the new seal ring.
Rotate piston until seal ring is flush with outer diameter of piston.
Figure 94 Figure 97
Install clutch piston inner seal ring Compress spring and retainer.
and size as described in figure 93. Install retainer snap ring.
Figure 95 Figure 98
Position piston in low clutch drum as shown. Install clutch inner bearing locating ring.
Use caution as not to damage inner and outer
piston sealing rings.

12/99 008 10-19
910 64
Figure 99 Figure 102

Install one steel disc. Install end plate retainer ring.

Install one friction disc. NOTE: the friction discs in the low clutch has a higher Install low speed gear inner bearing.
co-efficient rating than the friction discs in the other clutches therefore the
discs must not be mixed. The low clutch friction disc has a yellow make of
non-soluble paint on the outer diameter for permanent identification. Alternate
steel and friction discs until the proper amount of discs are installed. First disc
next to the piston in steel last disc installed is friction.

Install clutch disc end plate. Install low speed gear bearing spacer.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-20 299

Install clutch driven gear and hub into clutch Install low shaft front bearing.
drum. Align splines on clutch hub with internal
teeth of friction discs. Tap gear into position.
Do not force this operation. Gear splines must be in full
position with internal teeth of all friction discs.

Install low speed gear outer bearing. Install new oil sealing ring on low clutch shaft.
NOTE: New ring must be sized before installing
low shaft bearing cap.
A sizing tool can be made for ease of sizing oil sealing ring.
See section 12: “Service tools” (page 12-2).
Figure 107
Position low gear front bearing spacer.

12/99 008 10-21
910 64
Disassembly of reverse clutch

Remove clutch shaft piston rings. Pry reverse gear from clutch assembly far enough
to use a gear puller.

Remove clutch shaft front bearing retainer ring. Remove reverse clutch gear and outer bearing.

Remove clutch shaft front bearing. Remove clutch gear bearing spacer.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-22 301

Remove end plate retainer ring. Remove clutch gear inner bearing.

Remove end plate. Compress piston return disc springs.
Remove return spring retainer ring.

Remove inner and outer discs. Remove piston return disc springs and piston
spacer.
NOTE: Do not mix disc springs with any other disc
springs as they are matched spring packs.
See page 10-55.

12/99 008 10-23
910 64
Figure 122
Remove clutch piston. 2nd being disassembled.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-24 303
Disassembly of 2nd clutch

Remove end plate retainer ring. Compress piston return spring.
Remove retainer ring.

Remove end plate. Remove return spring, spring retainer
and retainer ring.

Remove inner and outer clutch discs. Remove clutch piston.
Reverse and 2nd clutch reassembly,
2nd being assembled.

12/99 008 10-25
910 64
Reassembly 2nd clutch

Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. Position piston return spring, spring retainer
The bleed valve in the clutch piston and retainer ring.
must be clean and free of any foreign material.
Install clutch piston outer seal ring.
Size as explained in figure 93.

Install clutch piston inner seal ring. Compress return spring and install retainer ring.
Size explained in figure 93.
Install clutch piston in clutch drum.
Use caution as not to damage sealing rings.

Position piston in 2nd clutch drum as shown. Install one steel disc.
Use caution as not to damage inner and outer piston
sealing rings.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-26 305
Reassembly 2nd clutch
Figure 135
Alternate steel and friction discs until the proper
amount of discs are installed. First disc next to the
piston is steel, last disc installed is a friction disc.
Figure 136
Install end plate.
Figure 137
Install end plate retainer ring.

12/99 008 10-27
910 64
Reassembly reverse clutch

Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. Position spring spacer and piston return springs.
Install clutch piston outer seal ring. First spring with large diameter toward spacer,
Size as explained in figure 93. see figure 143. Alternate five (5) springs.
See note in figure 121.

Install clutch piston inner seal ring. Position spring snap ring.
Size as explained in figure 93. Compress spring.
Install clutch piston in clutch drum. Install snap ring.
Spacer Piston
FWD
REV

Position piston in reverse clutch drum as shown.
Use caution as not to damage inner and outer
piston rings.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-28 307


Install one friction disc. Alternate steel and friction Install clutch gear inner bearing.
discs until the proper amount of discs are installed. NOTE: this bearing does not have a shield in it.
First disc next to the piston is steel, last disc installed
is a friction disc.

Install end plate. Install clutch gear bearing spacer.

12/99 008 10-29
910 64

Install reverse gear into clutch drum. Install bearing retainer ring.
Align splines on reverse gear with internal
teeth of friction discs. Do not force this operation.
Gear splines must be in full position with internal teeth
of all friction discs.

Install clutch gear outer bearing. Install clutch shaft piston rings.
NOTE: outer bearing has a shield in it, this shield
must be up.
Figure 152
Install clutch shaft front bearing.
NOTE: bearing outer diameter locating groove
must be up.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-30 309
Disassembly of forward clutch

Remove end plate retainer ring. Compress piston return disc springs.
Return spring retainer ring.

Remove end plate. Remove piston return disc springs and piston
spacer. See note in figure 121.

Remove inner and outer clutch discs. Remove clutch piston.

12/99 008 10-31
910 64
Disassembly of forward clutch
Figure 161
Remove clutch shaft sealing rings.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-32 311
Reassembly of forward clutch

Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. Position spring spacer and piston return springs.
Install clutch piston outer sealing ring. Size as First spring with large diameter toward spacer,
explained in figure 93. see figure 167.
Alternate five (5) springs: see note in figure 121.

Install clutch piston inner sealing ring. Position spring nap ring. Compress spring.
Size as explained in figure 93. Install snap ring.
Spacer Piston
FWD
REV

Install clutch piston in clutch drum,
use caution as not to damage sealing rings.

12/99 008 10-33
910 64
Reassembly of forward clutch


Install one friction disc. Alternate steel and friction Install clutch shaft sealing rings.
discs, until the proper amount of discs are installed.
First disc next to the piston in steel, last disc installed
is a friction disc.
Figure 170
Install end plate.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-34 313
Disassembly of 3rd clutch

Remove end plate retaining ring. Compress piston return spring and spring retainer.
Remove retainer ring.

Remove end plate. Remove return spring, spring retainer
and retainer ring.

Remove inner and outer discs. Remove clutch piston.

12/99 008 10-35
910 64
Disassembly of 3rd clutch
Figure 179
Remove sealing ring.
Figure 180
Remove 3rd clutch shaft rear bearing.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-36 315
Reassembly of 3rd clutch

Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. Install one steel disc.
The bleed valve in the clutch piston must be clean
and free of any foreign material.
Install clutch piston outer seal ring.
Size as explained in figure 93.

Install clutch piston inner seal ring. Install one friction disc. Alternate steel and friction
Size as explained in figure 93. discs until the proper amount of discs are installed.
First disc next to the piston is steel, last disc installed
is a friction disc.

Install clutch piston in clutch drum. Install end plate.

12/99 008 10-37
910 64
Reassembly of 3rd clutch

Install end plate retainer ring. Install new oil sealing ring on output shaft.
NOTE: New ring must be sized before shaft can be
assembled in transmission housing. A sizing tool can be
made for ease of sizing oil sealing ring.
See section 12: “Service tools” (page 12-2).

Position piston return spring, spring retainer Install 3rd clutch shaft rear bearing.
and retaining ring. NOTE: Bearing outer diameter locating ring
groove must be up.
Figure 189
Compress return spring and install retainer ring.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-38 317
Reassembly of converter housing

Refer to the “Cleaning and Inspection” pages. Install new stator support oil sealing ring.
Press turbine shaft bearing into position. Press support bearing into position.
Bearing groove must be down. NOTE: bearing part number must be up.

Position bearing spacer and bearing retaining ring. Install bearing retaining ring.

Install new turbine shaft oil sealing ring. When installing a new sleeve it is recommended
a press or a driver be used to prevent damage
to the sleeve and be sure the notch in the sleeve
is aligned with sleeve lock notch.

12/99 008 10-39
910 64

Install sleeve lock and cap screw, tighten screw Spread ears on turbine shaft bearing retainer
to specified torque (see torque chart). ring located in reaction member support. Tap turbine
shaft and bearing into position, being certain bearing
snap ring is in full position in snap ring groove.

Clean stator support mounting surface and tapped With new “O”-ring on shaft , position idler
holes with solvent. Dry thoroughly, being certain tapped shaft in converter housing.
holes are clean and dry. Position support in converter Tap shaft into position.
housing aligning holes in support with holes in housing.
Tap support into position.

Install 6 special stator support screws. Tighten screws to 12 - 16 lbs. Ft. Install idler shaft lock ball.
(16.3 – 21.6 Nm) torque. NOTE: assembly of the stator support to converter
housing must be completed within a 15 minute period from start of screw
installation. The special screw is to be used for one installation only.
If the screw is removed for any reason it must be replaced. The Loctite left in
the holes must be removed with the proper tap and cleaned with solvent.
Dry hole thoroughly and use a screw for reinstallation.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-40 319

Install idler shaft spacer. Position bearing spacer on shaft.

Install idler gear inner taper bearing on shaft with Install taper bearing on shaft with large diameter
large diameter of taper down. of taper up.

Position idler gear on bearing with hub of gear up. Install reverse idler baring retainer nut lockplate
as shown.

12/99 008 10-41
910 64
Reverse idler

Install reverse idler bearing nut with chamfer down.
Figure 211
Tighten nut 200 to 250 ft. lbs.
Torque (271.2 – 338.8 Nm). Use TG 1304-54.
Figure 212
Bend over tag of lock plate that aligns with one of the
slots of the lock nut, to secure it (See figure 213).
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-42 321
Reassembly of transmission

Install suction tube and new “O”-ring. Tap forward shaft piston ring sleeve into position.

With front and rear baffle seals in position, Install piston ring sleeve retainer ring.
locate baffle in position.

Tap forward shaft rear bearing into position. Position forward clutch assembly into transmission
housing. Use caution as not to damage forward shaft
piston rings.

12/99 008 10-43
910 64

Tap clutch assembly into position. Install gear retainer ring.

Locate low clutch assembly in housing. Install output shaft pilot bearing.
Tap into position.

Locate 3rd gear and clutch disc hub on forward Install output shaft and 3rd clutch.
clutch shaft. See note on figure 190.
NOTE: The 2-speed transmission will have only
a gear and not a clutch disc hub on it.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-44 323

Install low clutch rear bearing with snap ring groove Install rear cover, bolts and lockwashers.
to the rear.

Install low clutch rear bearing washer Tighten rear cover screws to specified torque
and retaining ring. (see torque chart).

Position new gasket and “O”-ring on rear Install output shaft rear bearing locating ring.
of transmission housing.
A thin coat of chassis grease will hold the gasket
and “O”-ring in place.

12/99 008 10-45
910 64

Install low shaft rear bearing locating ring. Install output shaft rear bearing spacer.

Position new “O”-rings on low shaft rear bearing cap. Apply a light coat of loctite 638 to the outer diameter of the
See note on figure 109. Install bearing cap. output oil seal. Press seal in bearing cap with lip of seal
toward bearing side of bearing cap. Position new “O”-rings
on bearing cap. NOTE: Some units will have a gasket only
between the cap and the cover. Install bearing cap on studs.

Install lockwashers and stud nuts, tighten nuts Install lockwashers and steel nuts.
to specified torque (see torque chart). Tighten nuts to specified torque (see torque chart).
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-46 325

Install brake adaptor, spacers, screws and Block flange to prevent turning. Tighten flange nut
lockwashers (use loctite 270 on screws). 200-250 ft. lbs. torque (271.2 - 339.0 Nm.).

Tighten screws to specified torque Position brake disc to output flange.
(see torque chart).

Install output flange, new “O”-ring, washer and nut. Install mounting screws and lockwashers.
Tighten screws to specified torque
(see torque chart).

12/99 008 10-47
910 64

Before installing parking brake (if used), Locate forward shaft pilot bearing.
see parking brake instructions
in section 11: “Options”.

Install 2nd clutch disc hub. Install 2nd speed clutch shaft rear pilot bearing
on shaft.

Install 2nd clutch disc hub retaining ring. Position reverse and 2nd speed clutch on
disc hub, aligning splines of disc hub with
internal teeth of 2nd speed clutch friction discs.
Disc hub must be in full position with friction discs.
Do not force this operation.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-48 327

Position a new gasket and “O”-rings on front Install a cap screw in the front and one in the rear of the converter housing and snug
up but do not tighten. This will hold the converter housing to the transmission
of transmission housing. A thin coat of chassis housing. Using a hook type hammer puller as shown, pull the reverse clutch gear
toward the front of the converter housing. This will move the reverse and 2nd clutch
grease will hold the gasket and “O”-rings in place. assembly forward to align the snap ring groove in the bearing with the snap ring in
the housing. Being certain bearing snap ring is in full position in snap ring groove,
remove pliers.

Position converter housing assembly on transmission Remove converter housing aligning stud.
case. Use caution as not to disturb housing “O”-rings Install converter housing and transmission housing
or gasket. capscrews. Tighten screws to specified torque
(see torque chart).

Spread ears on the reverse clutch front bearing snap Position auxiliary pump drive gear in converter
ring. Lock pliers open to hold snap ring open. housing. See figure 256.
Tap converter housing in place.
Use caution as not to damage reverse clutch front
piston rings.

12/99 008 10-49
910 64
Auxiliary pump
drive gear
Pump drive gear

Install cap screw with Loctite No. 243. Install cap screw with loctite 243.
Tighten cap screw to specified torque Tighten cap screw to specified torque
(see torque chart). (see torque chart).

Position charging pump drive gear (see figure 259). Using a new gasket and “O”-ring, position
charging pump assembly.
Install cap screws and lockwashers.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-50 329

Tighten screws to specified torque (see toque chart). Install idler gear bearing retaining ring.

Install new oil filter. Tighten 20 to 25 ft. lbs torque Position pump idler gear and bearing
(27.1 - 33.9 N.m.). NOTE: it is recommended in stab shaft.
that the filter cartridge be changed after 100 hours
of operation on new and rebuilt or repaired units.

Install pump hole cover, new gasket, Install idler gear bearing locating ring.
screws and lockwashers.
Tighten screws to specified torque
(see torque chart).

12/99 008 10-51
910 64

Press new seal in baffle with lip of seal toward Position converter assembly on stator support
impeller hub bearing. and turbine shaft.
Position new oil baffle sealing ring on oil baffle. NOTE: use extreme caution as not to cut,
break or unhook the oil sealing ring in the support.

Position oil baffle in housing and install retaining ring. Install converter assembly retaining ring.
Be sure ring is in full position in ring groove.

Position inner turbine locating ring on turbine shaft. With new “O”-ring in place, install bore plug.
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-52 331

Install bore plug retaining ring. If the control cover valve spools are to be inspected or the spool oil seals changed,
remove the valve spool stops as shown and pull spools out of oil seals. Always
replace oil seals if valve spools are removed for inspection. Sharp edges on valve
spool will cut lip of oil seal. When replacing oil seal, pick old seal out of housing
using caution as not to damage oil seal bore. Install new seal in control valve.
NOTE: When installing speed and direction selector spools through oil seal,
use extreme caution as not to cut lip of seal.

See special section on page 5-1 for drive plate Position detent balls in housing.
installation.

Position new gasket and modulation valve on Position new gasket and detent springs on housing.
converter housing (if used). Install control cover and cover to housing capscrews
and lockwashers.
Some units will have an electrical control valve.

12/99 008 10-53
910 64
Figure 280
Tighten cap screws to specified torque
(see torque chart).
T20000
008 910 642 & 3 INLINE BOMAG
12/99 10-54 333
Disassembly and reassembly of the T20000 Inline transmission
Note:
CLUTCH RETURN DISC SPRING PACKS ARE CERTIFIED ACCORDING TO COMPRESSION WEIGHT SPECIFICATIONS AND ARE
PRE-PACKED IN QUANTITIES TO REPAIR ONE
(1) SPECIFIC CLUTCH.
The disc spring packs are to be used as complete assemblies and care should be taken not to intermix the
individual disc springs with disc springs in another clutch or disc spring pack.
Each disc spring assembly is made up of selected springs to precisely match each part within this assembly.
Failure to replace all piston return springs can result in unequal deflection within the spring pack.
The result of this imbalance may adversely affect overall life of springs.

12/99 008 10-55
910 64
11. OPTIONS
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-1

008 910 64 BOMAG 335
11.1 PARKING BRAKES
11.1.1 Mechanical Brake
11.1.1.1 Sectional views and parts identification
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-2

336 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (MECHANICAL BRAKE)
1 7
8 5
11-3 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

008 910 64 BOMAG 337
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (MECHANICAL BRAKE)
1 Caliper - Parking brake 1

2 Disc - Brake 1
3 Assembly - Mounting bracket 1
4 Screw - Bracket assembly to bearing cap mounting 4
5 Washer - Bracket assembly to bearing cap mounting flat screw 4
6 Screw - Flange 6
7 Screw - Caliper to mounting bracket 2
8 Spacer 2
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-4

338 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - MECHANICAL BRAKE
16
14
12
15
10
13
11
4
9
6
8
2
7
3
1
11-5 12/99 T20000 2&3 INLINE

008 910 64 BOMAG 339
GROUP - MECHANICAL BRAKE
1 Screw 1
2 Anti-rotation clip 1
3 Washer 1
4 Lever 1
5 Spring 1
6 Shaft - Seal 1
7 Housing 1
8 “O”-ring 4
9 Bushing 2
10 Ball 3
11 Ball - Spacer 1
12 Rotor 1
13 Plain bearing 1
14 Rotor - Seal 1
15 Lever side pad 1
16 Carrier side path 1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-6

340 BOMAG 008 910 64
11.1.1.2 Adjustment and rebuild criteria

1. Check to insure floating parts move freely and that all other parts are mounted securely.
Tighten hardware as required.
2. Check actuator linkage to insure that there is adequate freedom of movement for positive brake
operation. Adjustment of pad gap is to be accomplished by adjusting the actuating cable or linkage.
If adjustment is used up, back off cable or linkage. Unbend tab on anti-rotation clip and loosen screw
enough to disengage lever spline. Rotate the lever one tooth, in the direction opposite the actuation
direction, and retorque the screw making sure the spline teeth are properly engaged.
Bend up a tab that aligns with one of the screw head flats, to prevent screw rotation.
Both lever and linkage must be free to return to home position. An external return spring is required.
3. Check disc surface condition. Replace if it is badly warped, pitted, or below minimum recommended
thickness. Check for loose mount bolts. Retighten if necessary.
4. Check to insure friction pads are not worn to less than .039” (1.0mm) thick. Replace worn friction pads.
Generally, if the disc is still running true and the pad clearance is still adjustable,
no other maintenance is required. To check for wear, measure the distance from the carrier side casting
face to disc face. If the distance is less than .060” (1.5mm), replace the friction pads.
11.1.1.3 Replacing friction pads
Note
STAMPED ON THE BACK OF EACH FRICTION PAD IS A CODE. THE FIRST 1 OR 2 CHARACTERS IS A NUMBER THAT
SPECIFIES THE FRICTION MATERIAL TYPE. CHECK TO INSURE NEW PADS ARE THE SAME AS THE WORN PADS REMOVED.
REPLACE FRICTION PADS ONLY IN PAIRS.
To replace the friction pads it is necessary to release the brake and disconnect the actuator
from the brake lever.
1. Remove one brake mounting bolt. Swing the brake up over the disc to expose the brake pads.
In close clearance applications the brake may be removed from the vehicle.
Using a flat bladed screw driver, pry out the used brake pads from their respective positions.
The lever side friction pad is snapped onto the plastic actuator cover. Care should be used in removing
the friction pad from the plastic actuator cover so as not to break off the center snap tabs.
2. Place the new friction pads in their respective positions.
The lever side friction pad has a center hole which snaps over the plastic snap tabs of the actuator
cover. The flat on the lever side pad must align with the flat on the plastic rotor cover,
allowing the pad to sit flat.
If the snap tabs are gone dab some silicone gasket adhesive around the back edge of the friction pad
and press firmly into place aligned as described above. Before placing the carrier pad in postition,
clean out excisting pad glue from the pad compartment.
Place a layer of silicone gasket adhesive all along the back edge of the carrier friction pad
and press firmly in place. Push the lever side pad into the brake as far as possible.
3. Swing the brake over the disc and install the mounting bolt and tighten all mounting bolts.
4. After friction pad replacement, the brake actuating lever is no longer in the correct position
for the actuating linkage.
Unbend tab on anti-rotation clip and loosen screw enough to disengage the lever spline.
Rotate the lever to the OEM and torque screw to 110 - 140 in.lbs.(12.4 -15.8 Nm). Bend up a tab
on the antirotation clip that aligns with one of the screw head flats, to prevent screw rotation.
Attach actuating cable or linkage to the lever. Adjustment of pad gap is accomplished by adjusting
the actuating cable or linkage.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-7

008 910 64 BOMAG 341
11.1.1.4 Disassembly
Perform disassembly on a clean work bench.
1. Disconnect the actuator cable or linkage and remove brake from its mounting.
2. Remove friction pads. (see “Replacing Friction Pads”)
3. Unbend anti-rotation clip tab away from lever holding screw. Remove screw, anti-rotation clip, washers,
lever, and spring.
4. Push out rotor assembly from the casting.
Caution
BALL SPACER AND 3 BALL BEARINGS MAY COME OUT WITH THE ROTOR ASSEMBLY.
(FOR ROTOR DISASSEMBLY SEE “SERVICING ROTOR ASSEMBLY”).
5. Remove 3 ball bearings and ball spacer.

6. Shaft seal need only be replaced if excessively wom or cracked. If replacement is necessary,
press out the plastic shaft seal from inside the casting, using a steel spacer block 1.078"(27.38mm)
diameter by 2.5” (63.5mm) long and an arbor press.
Note
POPULAR BRAND NAME 3/8" DRIVE 13/16" HEX DEEP SOCKET WORKS WELL AS A SPACER BLOCK.
7. After the shaft seal is pressed out, remove the sliver of plastic that may be left in the
groove in the casting.
This completes disassembly of the brake.
11.1.1.5 Cleaning and inspection

1. Clean all parts with denatured alcohol and either wipe dry with a clean lint free cloth
or blow dry with an air hose.
2. Examine all parts carefully for signs of excessive wear, damage, or corrosion.
Replace any parts found to be damaged.
3. Check rotor assembly for cracks. Replace if necessary.
4. Inspect the casting ball pockets for scoring, pitting, cracks or corrosion.
A corroded or deeply scored casting should be replaced.
Light scoring and stains may be removed.
5. Check to see that the disc is not bent or misshaped.
6. Check lever spring for breakage.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-8

342 BOMAG 008 910 64
11.1.1.6 Assembly
Prior to assembly make sure all parts are clean and serviceable.
1. Install a new shaft seal by inserting the seaI from the outside of the casting with the extended smooth
surface inserted first. Using an arbor press, with a protective spacer block between the arbor press
and the seal, gently press the seal in until it snaps into the groove in the casting.
2. Coat with grease, the ball pockets in the casting, the shaft and ball pockets of the rotor assembly.
3. Insert 3 ball bearings and ball spacer into the pockets in the casting.
4. From the inside of the casting slide the shaft of the rotor assembly thru the shaft seal
and seat the ball pockets against the ball beanrings.
5. PIace the spring over the large diameter pilot on the outside of the castıng.
6. Install the lever, making sure the small diameter of the spring is piloted on the outside
of the 4 pins in the lever. Set the lever in the OEM position.
7. Install the washers and anti-rotation clip with its tab inserted into the lower hole in the lever.
8. Insert screw into rotor assembly shaft and tighten to 110 - 140 in.lbs.(12.4 - 15.8Nm),
while guiding lever over rotor assembly spline.
9. After the proper torque is achieved and the lever is in the OEM position, bend up a tab
on the anti-rotation clip that aligns with one of the screw head flats, to prevent screw rotation.
10. Install the friction pads onto the rotor assembly and carrier. (see ‘’Replacing Friction Pads”).
11. Stroke lever in its proper direction. The lever must rotate thru 60 degrees of rotation.
Return lever to the OEM position and make sure the lever side friction pad is fully rerurned.
11.1.1.7 Replacing mount bushings

1. Push mount bushings completely out of the brake casting.
2. Remove the four (4) “O”-rings from the grooves in the casting, being carefull not to damage
the grooves. Clean the grooves and the bore with denatured alcohol or cleaning solvent. Let dry.
Lubricate the grooves and “O”-rings with the grease furnished with the service kit.
Install the “O”-rings into the grooves.
3. Coat the bushings with kit grease. Insert bushing through the “O”-ring.
Wipe off any excess grease.
11.1.1.8 Servicing rotor assembly

Disassemble brake as previously described.
1. Using a sharp knife, make several cuts through the outside diameler of the rigid plastic rotor cover.
Break apart the plastic, remove and discard.
2. Discard the plain bearing from under the plasic cover
3. ThoroughIy clean all dirt and grease residue from the rotor.
4. Amply grease one face of the new plain bearing and place it into the new rotor cover, grease to plastic.
Amply grease the other face of the insert.
5. To assemble the new plastic rotor cover a bench vise is necessary.
Snap a friction pad onto the plastic cover.
Place the plastic cover over rte rotor, place in a vice, and slowly squeeze the cover and rotor until
the cover snaps in place. Remove the friction pad and reassemble the brake as previously described.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-9

008 910 64 BOMAG 343
11.1.2 Spring applied hydraulic released brake (high pressure)
Note
PLEASE READ INSTRUCTIONS BELOW BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY WORK ON THE BRAKE.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-10

344 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (HIGH PRESSURE))
7 5
11-11 08/99 T20000 3&6 LD RS

008 910 64 BOMAG 345
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (HIGH PRESSURE))

2 Disc - Brake 1
6 Screw - Flange 6
7 Spacer 4
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-12

346 BOMAG 008 910 64
SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (HIGH PRESSURE)
17
2 5
24
22
4
21
7
8
6
20 11
23 10
9
13
14
15 16
12
3
1
18
19
11-13 08/99 T20000 3&6 LD RS

008 910 64 BOMAG 347
SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (HIGH PRESSURE)
1 Torque plate 1
2 Bolt - Hex 2
3 Jamnut 2
4 Housing - Spring 1
5 Plug 1
6 Bolt - Adjustment 1
7 Shim AR*
8 Spring disc 10
9 Piston 1
10 Seal - “O”-ring 1
11 Back-up ring 1
12 Piston 1
14 Back-up ring 1
16 Wiper 1
17 Bolt 1
18 Nut 1
19 Lining 2
20 Bleeder 1
21 Spring - Urethane 2
22 Washer - Flat 2
23 Cap - Plug 1
AR*: As Required
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-14

348 BOMAG 008 910 64
11.1.2.2 Operation
Ten disc springs (8) are used to hold the park brake in the actuated state.
The springs (8) push the pistons (9,12) into the lining and carrier assembly (19) which squeezes
a driveline mounted disc. The brake is released by fluid entering a SAE 7/16-20 threaded inlet
in the side of the torque plate (1) which pushes the pistons back and compresses the springs (8).

1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake.
2. Remove plug (5) and set running clearance (.020” - .030”) using the adjustment bolt (6).
3. Replace plug (5).
4. Even up running clearance on each side of the disc by adjusting the carrier retaining bolt ( 17).
The brake should be rebuilt when one or more of the following criteria are met:
1. Any signs of fluid leakage.
2. Lining thickness less than .031".
3. Cracked or chipped linings.

1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake and remove plug (5) and carrier bolt (17).
2. With pressure applied, back-off adjustment bolt (6) until piston (12) is flush with piston (9).
3. Release hydraulic pressure from the brake and remove lining and carrier assemblies (19).
Caution
IF THE PARK BRAKE IS BEING DISASSEMBLED WHILE ON THE VEHICLE, IT IS IMPORTANT TO FOLLOW THE DIRECTIONS
REGARDING THE REMOVAL OF THE SPRING HOUSING (4) AND THE LINING AND CARRIERS (19) VERY CLOSELY.
1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake and remove plug (5) and carrier bolt (17).
2. With pressure applied, back-off adjustment bolt (6) until piston (12) is flush with piston (9).
4. Using a press, compress springs (8) to reduce the force on the spring housing (4).
5. Use a spanner wrench to remove the spring housing (4) (counter-clockwise direction).
6. The springs (8) will be accessible when the spring housing is removed.
Note
THE SPRING HOUSING (4) MAY BE REMOVED WITHOUT COMPRESSING THE SPRINGS (8),
HOWEVER IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED DUE TO THE HIGH TORQUE REQUIRED.
7. The adjustment bolt (6) threaded part of the way into the hydraulic piston (9)
may be used to remove the pistons (9 and12) if brake is mounted on the vehicle.
8. If brake is not mounted to the vehicle it is easier to press the pistons out from the lining and carrier (19)
side of the torque Plate (1).
Caution
DO NOT DAMAGE SEALS (10,13,15) OR BACK-UP RINGS (11,14) OR THE WIPER (16) WHEN
REMOVING THE PISTONS (9 AND12).
9. Piston (12) may be removed from piston (9) by pushing on piston (12) through adjustment bolt hole
with a small nut-river or similar device.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-15

008 910 64 BOMAG 349

1. Clean all metal parts prior to assembly.
2. Blow excess cleaning solution off of all parts and out of all fluid passages.
11.1.2.7 Assembly
1. Apply a thin coat off fluid (compatible with mineral oil based hydraulic fluid) to seals (10,13,15),
Back-up rings (11,14) and the wiper (16).
2. Install seal (15) in seal groove on piston (12).
3. Slide the adjustment piston (12) into the bore located in the hydraulic piston (9)
until it hits the bottom of the bore.
4. Install wiper (16), back-up ring (14), and seal (13) in the grooves located in the small hole
in the torque plate (1).
5. Install seal (10) and back-up ring (11) in larger grooves in torque plate (1).
6. Install piston assembly into torque pIate. (1).
7. Thread adjustment bolt (6) into the hydraulic piston (9) until the bolt contacts
the adjustment piston (12).
8. Place springs (8) in the torque plate (1).
Springs should be placed in an alternating cupped face to cupped face orientation.
The springs on the outside ends of the stack should be oriented cupped face out.
9. If the brake contained a shim (7) when it was disassembled, place the shim (7)
so it will be in the bottom of the spring housing (4) when it is installed.
See illustration below for a graphical representation.
Note
SPRINGS ARE MATCHED AND PRETESTED. IF NEW SPRINGS ARE BEING INSTALLED ADD A SHIM ONLY IF THE NEW
SPRINGS ARE SHIPPED WITH ONE.
SHIM SPRINGS
10. Thread spring housing (4) into torque plate (1) about 3 turns or until it makes contact,
with the springs (8).
11. Using a press, compress springs (8) to reduce the force on the spring housing (4).
12. Use a spanner wrench to tighten spring-housing until the face bottoms out on the counterbore face
in the torque plate (1). Tighten to 500 - 600 lb.-in torque.
13. Assemble washer (22) and the urethane spring (21) on the mounting bolt (2) then slide mounting bolts
through bolt holes in the torque Plate (1).
14. Thread jam nut/sleeve (3) onto mounting bolt.
The cylindrical part of the jam nut/sleeve should extend into the torque plate.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-16

350 BOMAG 008 910 64
15. Install lining and carrier assemblies (19).

Thread lining and carrier adjustment bolt into hex nut (8) located in the slot
in the back side of the torque plate (1).
16. Install the bleeder (20) in the port located on the top side of the torque plate (1).
17. After brake is mounted and adjusted, snap plug (5) onto spring housing (4).
11.1.2.8 Installation
1. Slide brake over disc and into the mounting position.
2. Start mounting bolts (2) into mounting surface far enough to just support the brake.
3. Remove plug (5) and tighten adjustment bolt (6) until linings (19) are clamped to the disc.
4. Tighten mounting bolts (2) until they make contact with the urethane springs (21),
then tighten 1 to 2 flats more.
5. Tighten jam nut/sleeve (3) against mounting surface to torque shown in section 11.1.2.9.
Caution
BRAKE LININGS ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO CONTAMINATION.
WHEN INSTALLING OR SERVICING BRAKES KEEP ALL OIL AND FLUIDS AWAY FROM THE LININGS.
POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE MAY RESULT.
6. Attach brake line to inlet port located on the side of the torque plate (1).
7. Bleed brake system to remove trapped air as follows.
Note
USE BLEEDER HOSE ON BLEEDER SCREWS (PREFERABLY CLEAR TUBING) TO ROUTE FLUID AWAY
FROM THE BRAKE AND LININGS.
Caution
BRAKE USES HIGH PRESSURE, OPEN BLEEDER SCREW (20) VERY SLOWLY WHEN PERFORMING BLEEDING PROCEDURE.
8. Apply pressure to brake and slowly open the bleeder screw (20) observe any air bubbles
that flow from the brake.
9. Repeat above paragraph until no air is observed in the fluid from the bleeder screw (20).
11.1.2.9 Torque specs
PART (ITEM NO.) THREAD SIZE DRY TORQUE

BLEEDER SCREW (20) 7/16 - 20 200 - 250 (LB-IN)
JAMNUT/SLEEVE (3) 3/4 - 10 200 (LB-IN)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-17

008 910 64 BOMAG 351
11.1.3 Spring applied hydraulic released brake (low pressure)
Note
PLEASE READ INSTRUCTIONS BELOW BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY WORK ON THE BRAKE.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-18

352 BOMAG 008 910 64
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (LOW PRESSURE))
7 5
11-19 08/99 T20000 3&6 LD RS

008 910 64 BOMAG 353
GROUP - DISC BRAKE (SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (LOW PRESSURE))

2 Disc - Brake 1
6 Screw - Flange 6
7 Spacer 4
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-20

354 BOMAG 008 910 64
SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (LOW PRESSURE)
37
24
23
25
26
27
28
29
30 32
31 33
21 5
17 38
18
19
2
4
36 7
35 34
8
10 6
34
9
10
11
14
13
12
13
16
15
3
20 1
22
11-21 08/99 T20000 3&6 LD RS

008 910 64 BOMAG 355
SPRING APPLIED HYDRAULIC RELEASED BRAKE (LOW PRESSURE)
1 Torque plate 1
2 Bolt - Hex 2
3 Jamnut 2
4 Housing - Spring 1
5 Plug 1
6 Bolt - Adjustment 1
7 Shim AR*
8 Spring disc 10
9 Cam 1
10 Ball - Bearing 3
11 Cam 1
12 Bearing - Needle 1
13 Washer - Hardened 2
15 Piston 1
17 Lever 1
18 Ring - Retainer 1
19 Bolt 1
20 Nut 1
21 Pin - Cotters 1
22 Lining and carrier assembly 2
23 Cylinder - Hydraulic 1
24 Screw 2
25 Piston 1
26 Seal - STD poly pack 1
27 Sliding ring 1
28 Rod 1
29 Ring - Retaining 1
30 Rod excluder 1
31 Jamnut 1
32 Clevis 1
33 Clevis pin 1
34 Pin - Dowel 3
35 Spring - Urethane 2
36 Washer - Flat 2
37 Cap - Plug 1
AR*: As Required
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-22

356 BOMAG 008 910 64
11.1.3.2 Operation
Ten disc springs (8) are used to hold the park brake in the actuated state.
The springs push the cams (9,11) and piston (15) into the lining and carrier assembly (22)
which squeezes a driveline mounted disc.
The brake is released by fluid entering a SAE 7/16-20 threaded inlet in the top of the hydraulic cylinder
(23) which pushes the piston (25) down, thereby rotating the lever (17) and cam (11),
compressing the springs (8).

1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake.
2. Remove plug (5) and set running clearance (.020” - .030”) using the adjustment bolt (6).
3. Replace plug (5).
4. Even up running clearance on each side of the disc by adjusting the carrier retaining bolt ( 19).
The brake should be rebuilt when one or more of the following criteria are met:
1. Any signs of fluid leakage.
2. Lining thickness less than .031”.
3. Cracked or chipped linings.

1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake and remove plug (5) and carrier retaining bolt (19).
2. With pressure applied remove adjustment bolt (6).
Caution
IF THE PARK BRAKE IS BEING DISASSEMBLED WHILE ON THE VEHICLE, IT IS IMPORTANT TO FOLLOW THE FOLLOWING
DIRECTIONS REGARDING THE REMOVAL OF THE SPRING HOUSING (4) AND THE LINING & CARRIERS (22) VERY
CLOSELY.
1. Apply hydraulic pressure to the brake and remove plug (5) and carrier retaining bolt (19).
2. With pressure applied remove adjustment bolt (6).
4. Use a spanner wrench to remove the spring housing (4) (counter-clockwise direction).
5. The springs (8) will be accessible when the spring housing is removed.
6. Remove hair pin (21) and pin (33) from the clevis (32).
7. Remove hydraulic cylinder (23) from torque plate (1) by removing cylinder mounting bolts (24).
8. Remove retaining ring (18) and lever (17) from the spline on the cam (11).
9. The opposing cams (9, 11), adjustment piston (15) and dowel pins (34) can be removed by pressing
them out of the torque plate (1) from the lining and carrier (22) side.
10. Remove balls (10) and adjustment piston (15) from cams (9, 11).
11. The “O”-ring seal (16) can be removed from the adjustment piston (15) if necessary.
12. Remove needle bearing (12), hardened washers (13), and “O”-ring seal (14) from the torque plate (1)
once the cams (9, 11) are removed.
13. Slide the rod (28) and clevis (32) out of the hydraulic cylinder (23).
14. Remove the rod excluder (30) from the hydraulic cylinder (23) by prying with a small screwdriver.
15. The retaining ring (29) may be removed once the rod excluder (30) has been removed.
16. Press piston (25) out of the hydraulic cylinder (23) by pushing on the top of the piston
with a long slender rod.
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-23

008 910 64 BOMAG 357
Note
DO NOT SCAR CYLINDER WALLS OR NICK THE PISTON DURING REMOVAL.

1. Clean all metal parts prior to assembly.
2. Blow excess cleaning solution off of all parts and out of all fluid passages.
11.1.3.7 Assembly
1. Apply a thin coat of fluid to seals (14,16).
2. Install seal (16) in seal groove on adjustment piston (15).
3. Slide the adjustment piston (12) into the bore located in the cam (11) until the seal (16)
is inside the bore.
4. Install seal (14) in the grooves located in the small hole in the torque plate (1).
5. Install needle bearing (12) between the two hardened washers (13).
6. With bearing and washers (12,13) in place, install cam (11) and balls (10) into torque plate (1).
7. Install cam (9) and dowel pins (34) into torque plate (1).
8. Thread adjustment bolt (6) into the cam (9) until the bolt contacts the adjustment piston (15).
9. Place springs (8) in the torque plate (1).
Springs should be placed in an alternating cupped face to cupped face orientation.
The springs on the outside ends of the stack should be oriented cupped face out.
10. Replace the shim (7) in the bottom of the spring housing (4) before adding the springs if the brake
contained a shim when it was disassembled. See illustration below for a graphical representation.
Note
SPRINGS ARE MATCHED AND PRETESTED.
IF NEW SPRINGS ARE BEING INSTALLED ADD A SHIM ONLY IF THE NEW SPRINGS ARE SHIPPED WITH ONE.
SHIM SPRINGS
11. Apply a thin coat of Never-Seez to the spring housing (4) threads.
12. Screw spring housing (4) onto torque plate (1). Tighten with a spanner wrench until the spring
housing face bottoms out on the counterbore face in the torque plate (1).
13. Assemble washer (36) and the urethane spring (35) on the mounting bolt (2) then slide mounting
bolts through bolt holes in the torque plate (1).
14. Thread jam nut/sleeve (3) onto mounting bolt.
The cylindrical part of the jam nut/sleeve should extend into the torque plate.
15. Apply a thin coat of fluid to seal (25) and sliding ring (27).
16. Install seal (25) and the sliding Ring (27) on the Piston (25).
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-24

358 BOMAG 008 910 64
17. Install piston (25) into the hydraulic cylinder (23) with the flat side facing the top of the cylinder.
18. Push the piston (25) to the top of the hydraulic cylinder (23) and install the retaining ring (29)
in the groove at the bottom of the cylinder.
Note
MAKE SURE INLET PORT IS UNCAPPED WHEN INSTALLING PISTON (25).
19. Press rod excluder (30) with the rubber side facing out of the hydraulic cylinder (23).
20. Thread clevis (32) with the 3/8-16 jam nut installed into the rod (28).
21. Insert the rod (28) and clevis (32) through the rod excluder (30) into the hydraulic cylinder (23).
22. Position assembled hydraulic cylinder (23) onto torque plate (1) and install the cylinder mounting
bolts (24) into their respective holes.
23. Pin clevis (32) to the lever (17) with clevis pin (33) and hair pin (21).
24. Adjust rod (28) until it contacts the rod retaining hole in piston (25) and tighten the jam nut.
25. Install lever (17) on the spline of cam (11).
The centerline of the lever should be oriented parallel to the top of the torque plate (1).
26. Install retaining ring (18) in groove on the cam (11).
27. Install lining and carrier assemblies (22).
28. Thread carrier adjustment bolt (19) into hex nut (18) located in the slot in the back side
of the torque plate (1).
29. After brake is mounted and adjusted, snap plug (5) onto spring housing (4).
11.1.3.8 Installation
1. Slide brake over disc and into the mounting position (per vehicle specification).
2. Start mounting bolts (2) into mounting surface far enough to just support the brake.
3. Remove plug (5) and tighten adjustment bolt (6) until linings (22) are clamped to the disc.
4. Tighten mounting bolts (2) until they make contact with the urethane springs (35),
then tighten 1 to 2 flats more.
5. Tighten jam nut / sleeve (3) against mounting surface to torque shown in section 11.1.3.9.
Caution
BRAKE LININGS ARE SUSCEPTIBLE TO CONTAMINATION.
WHEN INSTALLING OR SERVICING BRAKES KEEP ALL OIL AND FLUIDS AWAY FROM THE LININGS.
POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE MAY RESULT.
6. Attach brake line to inlet port located on the top of the hydraulic cylinder (23).
11.1.3.9 Torque specs
PART (ITEM NO.) THREAD SIZE DRY TORQUE

PLUG-INLET (37) 7/16 - 20 12/17 (LB-IN)
JAM NUT/SLEEVE (3) 3/4 - 10 200 (LB-IN)
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 11-25

008 910 64 BOMAG 359
12. SERVICE TOOLS
12.1 REVERSE IDLER SHAFT NUT SOCKET (TG 1304 - 54)
Made from Snap-on IM662A Socket 2 1/16” drive 3/4”.
Ø 63
-0
Ø 61 +0.1
10
45°
4 SLOTS
6 +0-0.1
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 12-1

360 BOMAG 008 910 64
12.2 OIL SEALING RING SIZING TOOL
CONVENIENT LENGTH
POLISH
1/4
R
15°
0.747 DIA
13/8DIA 0.749
3/8DR.THRU R
3/4
T20000 2&3 INLINE 12/99 12-2

008 910 64 BOMAG 361
362
6.1
Printed in Belgium
Brugge, Belgium
BOMAG
Prepared and printed for SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY PRODUCTS by Brouwer Technisch Bureau
008 910 64
6.2 Differential gear
008 910 64 BOMAG 363

364 BOMAG 008 910 64

Differential gear 6.2
Service and Repair Manual
Type : STA 04 / STA 05 Differential in VP 2400 L (Stavostroj)
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Valid as of Serial no. 01
Preparation of data : 28.05 2004
Author: Rauh
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 1 GENERAL AND SERVICE WORK 2
1.1 Introduction 2
1.2 Ordering Spare Parts 2
1.3 Parts Liability and Guarantees for safety related components 3
1.4 Working Conditions and Tools 3
1.5 Service Work 4
1.5.1 Lubrication Table 4
1.5.2 Service Interval 5
2 REPAIR MANUAL 7
2.1 General 7
2.2 Disassembly 7
2.2.1 Removal of Pinion 7
2.2.2 Removal of the Crown Wheel 7
2.3 Installation of new Crown Wheel and Pinion 7

2.3.1 7
2.3.2 7
2.3.3 8
2.3.4 Pinion installation 8
2.3.5 Adjustment of the Backlash and Contact Pattern 9
008 910 64 BOMAG 365

Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
1 General and Service Work

1.1 Introduction
The series production of STA 05 was start in November 2002. This model contains a hydraulic
differential lock. The four outer planetary drives are driven by spur gears. Both axle housings are
mounted with slewing rings. The axle is not a steering axle and is constructed for direct frame
mounting with mounting surfaces for a lift cylinder. The main drive is achieved over a DIN 150
cardan flange. Two hydraulically operated multi-disk brakes used as operating brake and as
parking brake are sufficient for the installation.
1.2 Ordering Spare Parts
Spare parts for these NAF Axles should best be bought direct from an official STAVOSTROJ
supplier whereby many of the important parts are conveniently stored and available. Even when
parts are not immediately available, it is recommended to order from the supplier and not from the
factory. The supplier can usually describe the necessary part more accurately and give the part
number more precisely and therefore avoid errors and mistaken shipments.
For every spare part delivery, it is important to give the full exact type name with factory number
and year of fabrication. The type sign is located on the diff. Housing near the oil fill plug (refer to
Fig. 1).
Use only original NAF spare parts. Use of parts from other manufacturers voids every warranty
and may lead to impaired function such as service life.
Figure. 1
2
366 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
1.3 Parts Liability and Guarantees for safety related components

We strongly recommend changing complete components in the case of safety related components
such as ( control cylinders, steering cylinders, brake cylinders, spring housing cylinders, etc. ).
Once a safety related component has been disassembled or opened, all guarantees and liabilities
will be void and therefore NAF will not assume product liability for the drive unit. This also
applies, even if the complete drive unit is still under guarantee.
1.4 Working Conditions and Tools
A clean and well-lit work environment is necessary for an orderly proper repair. There should also
be enough room available to lay out the various parts and sub-assemblies and to put them in order.
Furthermore, a complete as possible quality tool set of all important tools and basic hardware is
needed. Additionally, certain special tools are also necessary, which usually prove to be of
invaluable help, especially, when one must perform certain repairs frequently. One spares oneself a
lot of time and frustration. The speciality tools will be described in the subsequent sections, i.e.
marked (e.g. with WZ. No.).
Furthermore, a certain expertise, and for some repairs, even specific training is necessary.
3
008 910 64 BOMAG 367
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
1.5 Service Work

1.5.1 Lubrication Table
Lubrication Table for STA 04 / 05

Lubricating Location No. Fill Quantity Lubricant
Differential 40/41/42 6.5 Litre SAE 90 (Hypoidoil) / GL 5
Description of the Lubricating Location Numbers:
No.: 40 ⇒ Breather alternatively oil fill plug for Differential
No.: 41 ⇒ Oil control plug Differential
No.: 42 ⇒ Oil drain plug for Differential
(refer to Fig. 1/3)
Examples for Brand-EP-Transmission oil SAE 90 specification: API-GL 5 or MIL-L-2105 B/C / LS
Fuchs (Renogear 90)
DEA (Deagear SAE 85 W-90), (Dearon BHS SAE 90)
Aral (Degol 3216)
Mobil (Mobilube SHC)
Esso (Gear oil LSA 85 W-90)
Shell (Gear oil 90)
BP (Energear 90)
ELF (Tranself BM 90)
Please refer to the legend of the Lubrication Plan concerning the fill quantity.
4
368 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
1.5.2 Service Interval

NAF axles are designed and built from long term experience and knowledge of work machines.
Proper functioning and constant work readiness is only achieved if the axle is well cared for,
properly handled and regularly serviced. This includes compliance to the service interval, the use
of appropriate lubricants corresponding to the Lubrication Table and checking various service
points. Special tools for maintenance work are not necessary.
Service Interval Table for STA 04 / 05

Operating Hours 0 / After -250 250 500 2000
Initiation 1 day (every) (every) (every)
or 1x year
Service Location (No.)
Differential (40/41/42) 1 2 3 2
Various visible nuts and bolts 4
1 = First filling (see section 1.5.2.1)

2 = Oil change (see section 1.5.2.2)
3 = Checking oil level (see section 1.5.2.3)
5
008 910 64 BOMAG 369
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
1.5.2.1 First Filling

Caution! The differential is delivered from NAF without oil.
Explanation: The differential housing and axle housing have a common oil chamber.
• Differential
Remove breather (No.40) or alternatively oil control plug (No.41) and fill oil corresponding to
the Lubrication Table until the oil reaches the lower edge of the oil control opening (No.41).
Check after approx. 5 minutes and if need be, refill. Tightening moment for the oil control plug
(No.41) 80+10 Nm and for the breather (No.40) is 70+10 Nm. (Fig. 1)
1.5.2.2 Oil Change
Note: Clean the area around the screw plugs (No.41/42) and the breather (No.40) beforehand.
• Differential
Perform oil change when oil is warm. Remove breather (No.40) then open oil drain plug
(No.42) and drain oil. Clean the oil drain plug (No.42) of any grime and of any existing filings,
before threading in. Fill new oil corresponding to the Lubrication Table, until the oil level
reaches the lower edge of the oil control opening (No.41). Tightening moment for the oil drain
plug (No.42) and oil control plug (No.41) is 80+10 Nm and for the breather (No.40) is 70+10 Nm.
(Fig. 1).
1.5.2.3 Checking Oil Level
Note: Clean the area around the screw plugs of dirt beforehand.
• Differential
Open the oil control plug (No.41) and check the oil level. The oil level must reach the lower
edge of the oil control opening (No.41), if necessary add oil. (Fig. 1). Tightening moment for
the oil control plug (No.41) is 80+10 Nm
6
370 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
2 Repair Manual
2.1 General
• When servicing the differential, the axle must be removed from the vehicle. If the damage is
serious enough it may be more advantages to exchange the complete differential, rather than
repair it.
• As a prerequisite for a proper repair, cleanliness and certain technical knowledge are required.
• Prior to any repair the oil must be drained.
2.2 Disassembly
2.2.1 Removal of Pinion
• Remove hex bolt M14x35 from the bearing retainer. With a rubber hammer, tap the bearing
retainer on the side to loosen it and by inserting two pry-bars at the bearing retainer, pull the
bearing retainer and pinion out.
• Clamp the pinion in a large vice (if required use soft jaws) and. heat the pinion nut M40x1.5
to approx. 150°C and loosen. Remove hex bolts from the bearing cover situated behind the
pinion flange and pull the bearing cover off. Clamp bearing retainer and push out pinion
through the bearing inner rings.
• Remove the bearing inner ring from the pinion with the use of a extractor.
2.2.2 Removal of the Crown Wheel
• Loosen hex bolt M14 at the housing split, and with the use of a rubber hammer tap the cover
to loosen and remove.
• Remove the differential cage complete with mounted crown wheel.
• Loosen wheel mounting hex bolts M14x40 and remove the crown wheel.
2.3 Installation of new Crown Wheel and Pinion
2.3.1
• The crown wheel and pinion can only be exchanged as a matched set since they have been
mated to one another! Matched components are identified by numbers. (the pinion is marked
on the face and the crown wheel is marked on the outside circumface)
2.3.2
• Prior to installing the new parts, the compensating gears in the differential cage are to be
inspected. For this the one cage half can be removed after loosening the hex bolts M12x100.
Defective parts (gears, crossbolt, worn out sleeves and thrust washers) are to be replaced. The
thickness of the thrust washers of the axle shaft gears is to be chosen such that the gears can
compensate smoothly. When reassembling the two halves, the proper orientation must be
maintained. (mark on both halves at the circumference). The hex bolts M12x100 are secured
with coating of micro capsules of adhesive. They can only be turned in and out before having
to be replaced.
7
008 910 64 BOMAG 371
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
Tighten bolts immediately with 115 Nm and not retighten.

Attention: The differential cage halves cannot be exchanged separately but rather as a left and
right half together.
2.3.3
• Clean the contact surface of the crown wheel and differential cage of any chemicals and
particles and also remove any oil. Insert the crown wheel and tighten hex bolts M14x40 in a
crosswise manner with a torque wrench to 220 Nm. These bolts are also secured with a
coating of adhesive in micro caplets. If new bolts are used then initial torque can only 185 Nm
2.3.4 Pinion installation
• Installing pinion into the differential housing, fitting pinion head bearing.
Press pinion head bearing onto pinion shaft then mount pinion into differential housing.
Where new bearings are used, press new bearing outer races into housing first. Slide on spacer
sleeve and mount the pinion flange with counter washer. Whilst continuously spinning the
pinion, tighten the nut M40x1.5. The thickness of spacer may need to be adjusted several
times until the pinion is able to be rotated with between 1 – 2 Nm at its full torque 100+5 Nm.
This can be checked by placing a 10 mm bolt into the pinion flange and whilst keeping the
bolt horizontal place a weight of approx. 20N on it. The pinion should then start to evenly
rotate.
When this setting is reached remove the pinion nut, mount the bearing cover including the oil
seal paying particular attention to the correct locating of the oil return opening.
• Re-tighten the pinion nut
Clean pinion thread M40 and pinion nut from dirt, oil and inhibitors. Coat entire diameter and
length of thread of pinion and pinion nut, with Loctite 262. Apply wear and seizing inhibiting
paste to the contact surface of the nut (No.50).
(i.e. Wolfracote SSP from Klüber)
8
372 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
2.3.5 Adjustment of the Backlash and Contact Pattern

• First the housing must be carefully cleaned and both small side covers of the housing halves
are to be removed (each 8 bolts M10). If both tapered roller bearing inner rings of the
differential cage were renewed, then the outer rings must also be renewed.
• Now both adjusting rings Sk. 3.70-047 of the assembly jig are to be mounted, each with 4
bolts M10x40 and the threaded ring Sk. 3.70-048 is to be turned in. (lubricate the thread or
coat it with Molykote). The differential cage, complete with mounted crown wheel, is to
inserted and the housing cover is to be mounted and tightened. Turn in and tighten the
threaded ring until 10 N of force is required to turn the crown wheel at its circumference
through the bearing retainer opening (now the preload is properly adjusted). Since the bearing
outer rings of the differential cage must be moved when doing this, a high torque is required
which can be achieved with the use of a lever Sk 3.70-049 and hitting of a hammer on this
lever.
• Mount adjusting washers 712-509 in the bearing retainer, paint the teeth of the pinion with a
thin oil paint or ink and insert the bearing retainer. Insert bolts M14 and tighten bearing
retainer in a crosswise manner.
• Now simultaneously turn the threaded rings Sk. 3.70-048 in the same direction and same
angle until a backlash of approximately 0.15 to 0.25 mm (equals approximately 0.4 to 0.6 mm
on the circumference of the drive shaft flange) at the tightest point is reached. Turn the pinion
by hand half a direction numerous times. Loosen bearing retainer and pull it out. Inspect the
contact pattern on the crown wheel and pinion. If the contact pattern is per Figure 2, then the
adjustment is correct.
9
008 910 64 BOMAG 373
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
If the contact pattern as per Fig. 3 or 4, then by

moving the pinion with use of varying thickness of
adjusting washer between the bearing retainer
housing and differential housing figure 2 can be
obtained. By turning the threaded rings and the crown
wheel as indicated by Figure 3 or 4 can also be
adjusted.
Figure 2
Attention: Note proper bearing preload and backlash when turning the thread rings. Remove any
old paint from the previous adjustment fore attempting to readjust.
Figure 3 Figure 4
Once the proper contact pattern has been adjusted, usually after
numerous attempts, the bearing retainer must be tightly
mounted. Now the adjusting rings must be removed and with
depth gauge dimension “X” which is the bearing outer ring to
the bearing cover plate surface must be measured. The adjusting
washers 7512.011 are to be determined when added together
such that this dimension touches the bearing cover plate.
Calculation: Sum of all adjusting washers thicknesses of one
side:
Z=Y–X
Figure 4
Prior to starting repairs, adjusting washers of various thicknesses should be obtained:
Adjusting Washer 7509.012 0.4 / 0.5 / 0.6 / 0.7 / 1.0 / 2.0 Bearing Retainer
Adjusting Washer 7512.011 0.4 / 0.5 / 0.6 / 0.7 / 1.0 / 2.0 Bearing Ret., side
Adjusting Washer 7317.038 various lengths Pinion Bearing
10
374 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
STA 05
11
008 910 64 BOMAG 375
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
STA 04
12
376 BOMAG 008 910 64
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
NAF Tool table for STA 04/05 differential

Description: WZ number:
Adjusting ring WZ 652/01 (Sk 3.70-047)

to adjust the bearing pre-load on the differential casing
Threaded washer WZ 652/02 (Sk 3.70-048)
Second part to the adjusting ring
Lever WZ 652/03 (Sk 3.70-049)
For turn the threaded washer
13
008 910 64 BOMAG 377
Drawing no.: DG 0600.108 / DG 0600.109
Author: Rauh
Revisions reserved
Neunkirchen on the May 28,2004
14
378 BOMAG 008 910 64
7 Circuit diagrams
008 910 64 BOMAG 379

Circuit diagrams
●
The circuit diagrams valid at the date of printing are
part of these repair instructions.
● The circuit diagrams valid for the machine serial
number can be found in the spare parts catalogue
for the machine.
380 BOMAG 008 910 64

7.1 Wiring diagram
008 910 64 BOMAG 381

7.1 Wiring diagram
382 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64
Inhaltsverzeichnis: BW 24 R, mit 24V Fremdstartsteckdose
table of contents: BW 24 R, with 24V jump start socket
Wiring diagram
Blatt Nr.: Zeichnungsnummer

Funktionsgruppe function unit
sheet no.: drawing ï no.
001 380 114 39 Stromlaufplan Circuit Diagram
002 380 114 39 Versorgung, Starten supply, starting unit
003 380 114 39 Fahren travel system
004 380 114 39 Überwachung monitoring unit
005 380 114 39 Blinker, Arbeitsbel., Rundumkennl., Bremsl., Signalhorn illumination, working, warningï, brake lights, warning horn
006 380 114 39 Scheibenw., Berieselung, Klimaanl., Geschw.anzeige windsreen wiper, sprinkler system, air condit., speedometer
101 380 114 39 Bauteilliste component listing
201 380 114 39 Zentralelektrik cross bonding box
BOMAG
19.09.2003
Nallin Stromlaufplan 380 114 39
19.09.2003 circuit diagram
Kneip 001
7.1
383
384
7.1
30 5:1
F01 1 15 4:1
BOX A
X100:31ï X100:30+ A
ZA Fremdstart 24V
option jump start 24V X103:+12V X9:18 19
86
X41:1 F77 8
88a X45:5 6
BOX A
X103:+24V K142 30 H K11
X101:1
2:4 88 S00 85
F77
3:2
H83
Zündstartschalter
ignition switch 50a 15/54
S126
X45:7 3:10 86
1 K32
defekte Batterie
R09 X9:17 S126
defective battery
50A
3.3_O (4x6) X3:28 D+ 4:1 85
4:2
X101:2
X3:27 2 Kabine
30 cabin
K38
1
3:3 S125
X31:1 X31:2 87 87a
X103:+H83
Generator 2
X2:75 generator D+
86 W
V17 K142 X2:74 G02
85 X2:73
Bï B+
X2:72 1
X103:ï S111
V18 86
X35:25
A82
BOMAG
2 F05 F00 K39
Box B 2
B 30 85
K39
2:12 K24 30
br/bn
ge/ye
X3:29 86
or/orn
rt/red
gn/grn
87 87a 2:16
X9:20 G01 K24 87 87a
+ X35:26
85
+ 30 50 X39 3:1
XS ï
H85 H84 ï 12V X7:56
M01 X19:2 X3:33,34
A82 aktiv, activ A82 bereit/ready 3 X19:1 V12
S30
X9:21 ï
AW HW
Y04
4 X39:6 V14
X19:4 Y13
X3:33,34
31 3:1
2:11 2:18 5:12 6:9
88a 88
2:4 Batterie Starter Startrelais Hubmagnet Motor Bremse
battery starter relais, starter shut off solenoid engine brake
19.09.2003
Nallin Versorgung, Starten 380 114 39
19.09.2003
Kneip supply, starting unit 002
008 910 64
Wiring diagram
008 910 64
S126
2:18 F77 2:16
Wiring diagram
X26:1
Fahrhebel links
VP travel lever lh
S142
123 RNF
X10:5 X10:6
AC D N R F
A66
X26:2 X10:2 Elektronik Steuereinheit
electronic control unit
X26:3 X10:8
X27:3 X27:1
X10:4
X10:10
X10:3
X26:4 X28:1 X10:7 X10:15
X10:1 X10:16
X29:3 X29:1
X10:9 X10:18
X28:3 X28:2
BOMAG
X10:21ï24 X10:17
AC D N R F
X28:4
123 RNF
X1:55
X1:46
X10:14 X10:13
ge/yel
br/brn
ws/wht
gn/grn
30 X5:43 X5:44 X5:45 X5:46 X7:55
K48
3:2 S143 1 1 X18:1 X18:3 X33:1 X33:3
86
87 87a VP Fahrhebel rechts H62 H61 X16:5
travel lever rh 2 2 2 2
K48 2 86 2
4:13 H14
X38:5 H11 V02 1 V03 1 V01 1 V04 1
85 86 +
K42 Y03 Y130 Y16 Y17
K38 85 ï
2:13 X39 85 X18:2 X42:71 X18:4 X33:2 X33:4
31 X3:33,34
2:20 31 4:1
3:3 2:12 5:6 Rückfahrwarnsummer

back up alarm buzzer
Fahrhebelï0 Anlassteuerung Lenkung rechts Fahrstufenumschaltug Fahren vorwärts Fahren rückwärts

travel leverï0 starter control steering right speed range selection traveling forward traveling backward
Lenkung links
steering left
19.09.2003
Nallin Fahren 380 114 39
Kneip
19.09.2003 travel system 003
7.1
385
386
7.1
2:20 15 15 5:1
2:14 50A 6
F04
Box B F
Blinker links indicator left H05L
5:4
X1:22
Blinker rechts indicator right H05R 5:4
X9:22
+ + + +
Warnblinker hazard light
X1:76 H06 5:2 P14 P24 P01 P25
X1:17 _GC _GC Q MPa

Berieselung
H22
30 6:1 G ï G ï G ï G ï
K61 Sprinkler system
V13
X43:2
4:2 X1:16a X1:15 Fahrhebelï0ïStellung H11 3:5
87 87a travel leverï0ïposition
X43:1
X43:3
X43:8
V16 X44:15
X1:76
X1:16a
white
yellow
green
86 A15 X43:7
Überwachungsmodul X46:7
K61 X1:16 monitoring module
rot/red
weiß/lila
white/lilac
grün
weiß/schwarz X43:4
white/black
grauX43:5
gray
braun/gelb
brown/yellow
85
Lampentest
V15 weiß
V09 gelb
X44:16
R21
R20
R23
R22
R24
orange
X1:22
H08
H09
H43
H15
H59
H05
H06
H22
H11
H01
BOMAG
R09 1
lila
blau
blue
lilac
H10
2 ï
weiß/grau
weiß/grün
weiß/blau
white/gray
white/blue
white/green
white/brown
X7:58 X7:59 X3:32 X3:30 X7:60 X3:31
schwarz/black
X9:23
X7:61
X40:9 X11:1
X44:9
X44:11
D+
X44:10
X44:13 weiß/braun
X44:12
X44:14
2:11 X1:12
X43:6
Relais D+ D+
X11:2
X1:23 1 1 1 1
P00 B05
X34:10 X32:12 X32:13
B53 B87 R03 B89
P
X34:11
2 2 2 2
ï B06 B12 B03
X3:33,34 P P P
3:20 31 31 5:1
4:3 Betriebsstundenzähler Motoröldruck Bremse Parkbremse Kühlmitteltemperatur Tankanzeige

engine hour meter engine oil pressure brake brake collant temperature level gauge
Luftfilter Getriebeöltemperatur Getriebeöldruck

air cleaner gear lubr., oil temp.
gear lubr., oil pres.
19.09.2003
Nallin Überwachung 380 114 39
19.09.2003
Kneip monitoring unit 004
008 910 64
Wiring diagram
4:20 15 15
2:20 30 30 6:1
008 910 64
K11
H06 X37:3 30 K11 6:2
4:13
2:19 7 F41
linker Schalter Blinker
87a 87
left switch, indicator G BOX A
Wiring diagram
F08 7 3 F07
BOX A
BOX B
G C Schalter Beleuchtung X8:63
switch, lighting 11 23
F08:1
F08:1 5:15 012 5:2 3 X20:1
S15 S38
ZA/ S141 3
X21:1
L0R 14 23 23 14 L0R option
3 01 23 12 64 33 44 12 24 4
S26
S14 S17 S18
S45 4
24 11 63 34 43 87a 13 24 24 13
4 30
3:9 S45 3
S03
K42 87 rechter Schalter Blinker
1
right switch, indicator E61 E62 E04
E29
4
2 1 X6:52
X3:33.34
Warnblinkschalter
H05L X36:1 E58
switch, hazard light

4:13
4 5 4 5 2
X8:64
H05R X36:2 F09 F10 F11 F12 B102 3

BOX A X4:40
4:13 D BOX A E BOX B D E BOX B
P
X6:47
X20:3
4
links/left
X15:6
1
X4:38 X6:50 X4:39 X6:51 X6:48 X4:36 X4:37 X6:49 X4:35 X4:42
BOMAG
+ B11
rechts/right
X15:4 X16:4 X15:5 X17:4 X16:1 X15:2 X15:3 X17:1 X15:1 X15:8 E01 E02 E50 E45 E32 2
ï
X17:2 X16:2
1 1 1 1 56b 56b X3:33,34
49 49a X16:3 X17:3
X21:5 X21:4
1 1 A02 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ï ï
E13 2 E12 E14 2 E15 2 E16 E17
E28 E27 1 1
X20:9 X20:8
2 2 E33 E34
31 E08 2 E59 2 E09 2 E10 2 E60 2 E11 2
X8:68 X8:67 2 2
X21:7
X16:6
X17:6
X15:10
31 X15:11 31 6:1
4:20
Blinkrelais Blinkleuchte VL Blinkleuchte VR Schlußleuchte links Schlußleuchte rechts X23 Signalhorn
6:11
indicator relay indicator front, LH indicator front, RH tail light, LH tail light, RH warning horn
Scheinwerfer, hinten Blinkleuchte SL Blinkleuchte SR Parkleuchte links Scheinwerfer links Innenleuchten Bremsleuchten
working head lights, rear indicat.lateral lh indicat.lateral rh parking light, LH head light LH interior lights brake light
Blinkleuchte HL Blinkleuchte HR Parkleuchte rechts Scheinwerfer rechts Rundumkennleuchte
indicator rear, LH indicator rear, RH parking light, RH head light RH rotary beacon
19.09.2003
Nallin Blinker, Arbeitsbel., Rundumkennl., Bremsl., Signalhorn 380 114 39
19.09.2003
Kneip 0512 illumination, working, warningï, brake lights, warning horn 005
7.1
387
388
7.1
5:20 30
30
K32
2:20
5:20 K11
8 87a 87
F88
Box A 2
F31
H 1 Box B 3
6 F27 F33
F06 Box B B Box B
X6:53
Box A
A X13:1 C
F
X57:2 X8:66 X8:65
S44
X6:54
+ X20:4 X20:5 3
S05 3 E04 P04 X:55 X21:2 X21:3 X13:2
X57:1 ï 5 1
4 5
5 5
S21 S145
OUTï
OUT+
15/54
15/54
V10
V11
30 K23 LERN 3 3
A05 7
S20
6:3 learning 1
012 S102 5
87a 87 7 1
86 X21:8 X21:6
IN
GND
GND
H22 K23
4:13 1
TEST
X37:4 1 X25:1
5
85 B103
X7:62 X23:3 X23:1 X21:10 X21:11 P
B104
X12:1
BOMAG
P
X56:C
X56:B
X56:A
M05
BR/BN
B15 X25:2
B09 1 1 2
P X1:71 30
K09
2 X23:2
X22:1
X22:3
X22:2
1 2 86 6:19
X22:4
SW/BK
+ A01 R26 K09 87 87a
R25
M02 BL/BU 3
85
ï X25:3
4
S146 3
ZA Geschwindigkeitsanzeige + + +
X12:2 option speedometer 1
M04
M06 M07 M13 1
X23
5:16 ï Y15 2
ï ï
5:20 31
Berieselungspumpe 6:2 Scheibenwischer vorn Scheibenwascher hinten Gebläse Heizung 6:20

sprinkler pump windsceen wiper motor, front windscreen washer motor, rear blower heating
Scheibenwischer hinten
windscreen wiper motor, rear Mag.Kuppl. Klimakompressor
Scheibenwascher vorn mag. clutch air cond. compr.
windscreen washer motor, front
18.09.2003
Nallin Scheibenwischer,ïwascher, Berieselung, Klimaanlage, Geschw.anzeige 380 114 39
19.09.2003
Kneip windsreen wiper, ïwasher, sprinkler system, air condit., speedometer 006
008 910 64
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram 7.1
Name Bl. Pf. Benennung title TYP
A01 006 3 Intervallschalter Berieselungssystem intervall switch, sprinkler system 0.17W
A02 005 3 Blinkrelais indicator relay 0.06W
A05 006 5 Elektronik Geschwindigkeitsanzeige Electronic system, speedometer
A66 003 9 Elektronik Steuereinheit Electronic control unit
A82 002 3 Starthilfeschaltung 12/24V jump start circuit 12/24V
B03 004 8 Unterdruckschalter Luftfilter Vacuum switch, air cleaner

B05 004 13 Druckschalter Bremse Pressure switch, brake
B06 004 6 Druckschalter Motoroel Pressure switch, engine oil
B09 006 2 Druckschalter Berieselungssystem Pressure switch, sprinkler system
B11 005 20 Signalhorn Warning horn 96W
B12 004 7 Druckschalter Bremse Pressure switch, brake
B15 006 7 Aufnehmer Geschwindigkeit Transducer, speed Schließer 4mm
B53 004 15 Temperaturgeber Kuehlmittel Temperature switch, collant
Kneip
23.9.03
Nallin
23. 9. 3
B87 004 16 Temperaturgeber Getriebeoel Sender, gear lubr. oil temperature

B89 004 19 Druckgeber Getriebeoel Sender, gear lubr. oil pressure
B102 005 19 Druckschalter Bremsleuchten Pressure switch, brake lights
B103 006 19 Temperaturschalter Klimaanlage Temperature switch, air conditioning
B104 006 19 Druckschalter Klimaanlage Pressure switch, air conditioning
E01 005 14 Beleuchtung Tankanzeige Illumination, level gauge 2W

E02 005 14 Beleuchtung Temperaturanzeige Illumination, temperature gauge 2W
E04 005 16 Beleuchtung Geschwindigkeitsanzeige Illumination, speedometer 2W
E04 006 4 Beleuchtung Geschwindigkeitsanzeige Illumination, speedometer 2W
E08 005 4 Blinkleuchte vorne links Indicator, front, lh. 21W
E09 005 6 Blinkleuchte hinten links Indicator, rear, lh. 21W
E10 005 7 Blinkleuchte vorne rechts Indicator, front, rh. 21W
E11 005 8 Blinkleuchte hinten rechts Indicator, rear, rh. 21W
E12 005 10 Parkleuchte links Parking light, lh. 5W
E13 005 9 Schlussleuchte links Tail light, lh. 5W
E14 005 11 Parkleuchte rechts Parking light, rh. 5W
E15 005 11 Schlussleuchte rechts Tail light, rh. 5W
E16 005 12 Scheinwerfer links Head light, lh. 55W
E17 005 13 Scheinwerfer rechts Head light, rh. 55W
E27 005 2 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten links Working head light, rear, lh. 55W
E28 005 1 Arbeitsscheinwerfer hinten rechts Working head light, rear, rh. 55W
E29 005 17 Innenleuchte Kabine Inside light, cabin 2x10W
E32 005 16 Kennleuchte Warning light 55W
E33 005 19 Bremsleuchte links Brake light, lh. 21W
E34 005 19 Bremsleuche rechts Brake light, rh. 21W
E45 005 15 Beleuchtung Oeldruckanzeige Illumination oil pressure indicator 2W
E50 005 14 Beleuchtung Wasseranzeige Illumination water indicator 2W
E58 005 18 Innenleuchte Kabine Inside light, cabin 2x10W
component listing
E59 005 5 Blinkleuchte links seitlich Indicator, lateral lh 21W

E60 005 8 Blinkleuchte rechts seitlich Indicator, lateral rh 21W
Bauteilliste
E61 005 14 Beleuchtung Reifendruckanzeige Illumination 2W

E62 005 15 Beleuchtung Bremsdruckanzeige Illumination 2W
F00 002 9 Hauptsicherung Batterie Fuse, main, battery 80A

F01 002 12 Hauptsicherung Fuse, main 35A
F04 004 6 Sicherung Instrumente Fuse, gauges 10A
F05 002 7 Sicherung Steckdose Fuse, socket 10A
F06 006 2 Sicherung Berieselung Fuse, sprinkler system 10A
F07 005 3 Sicherung Warnblinker Fuse, hazard light 15A
F08 005 1 Sicherung Blinker u. Arbeitsscheinw. Fuse, indicators a. work. head light 15A
F09 005 9 Sicherung Parkï u. Schlussl. links Fuse, parking and tail light, lh. 5A
F10 005 11 Sicherung Parkï u. Schlussl. rechts Fuse, parking and tail light, rh. 5A
F11 005 12 Sicherung Scheinwerfer links Fuse, head light, lh. 7.5A
F12 005 13 Sicherung Scheinwerfer rechts Fuse, head light, rh. 7.5A
F27 006 10 Sicherung Wischer u. Wascher vorne Fuse, windscr. wiper and washer, fr. 10A
F31 006 15 Sicherung Kabinenluefter Fuse, cabin ventilator 20A
F33 006 20 Sicherung Klimageraet Fuse, air conditioning 10A
F41 005 18 Sicherung Rundumkennleuchte Fuse, rotary beacon 20A
F77 002 18 Sicherung Fahren Fuse, traveling 10A
F88 006 6 Sicherung, Frequenzï/Geschwindigkeitsanz. Fuse, frequenzyïand speedometer 10A
G01 002 9 Batterie Battery 100Ah

G02 002 10 Generator Generator
H01 004 12 Meldeleuchte Bremse Indicator light, brake

H05 004 10 Meldeleuchte Blinker Indicator light, indicators
H06 004 10 Meldeleuchte Warnblinker Indicator light, hazard light
H08 004 6 Meldeleuchte Ladekontrolle Indicator light, charge control
H09 004 6 Meldeleuchte Oeldruck Motor Indicator light, engine oil pressure
H10 004 4 Warnsummer Bremse Warning buzzer, brake system
H11 004 11 Meldeleuchte Fahrhebel ’0’ïStellung Indicator light, travel lever ’0’ pos.
H14 003 19 Warnsummer Rueckwaertsfahrt Backïup alarm buzzer
H15 004 8 Meldeleuchte Motorluftfilter Indicator light, engine air filter
H22 004 11 Meldeleuchte Berieselung Indicator light, sprinkler system
H43 004 7 Meldeleuchte Bremsdruck Indicator light, brake pressure
H59 004 9 Meldeleuchte Differentialsperre Indicator light, differential lock
H61 003 10 Meldeleuchte Lenkung rechts Indicator light, steering rh
1
H62 003 8 Meldeleuchte Lenkung links Indicator light, steering lh

H83 002 1 Warnleuchte Batterie Warning light, battery LED Rot
H84 002 4 Meldeleuchte Fremdstartmodul bereit indicator light, jump start modul ready LED
H85 002 3 Meldeleuchte Fremdstartmodul aktiv indicator light, jump start modul activ LED
4
K09 006 19 Relais Klimageraet Relay, air conditioning BOSCHW

K11 002 19 Relais Klemme 30 auf 15 Relay, terminal 30 to 15 BOSCHW
K23 006 3 Relais Berieselungssystem Relay, sprinkler system BOSCHW
K24 002 16 Relais Bremssperre Relay, brake lock BOSCHW
380 114 39
K32 002 20 Relais Kabine Relay, cabin BOSCHW

K38 003 3 Relais Anlassteuerung Relay, starter control BOSCHW
K39 002 12 Relais Anlasser Relay, starter BOSCHW
K42 003 9 Umschaltrelais Relay, switch over BOSCHW
K48 003 2 Relais Fahrhebel 0ïStellung Relay, travel lever 0ïposition BOSCHW
101
K61 004 2 Relais Ladekontrolle Relay, charge control BOSCHW

K142 002 4 Relais Fremdstart Relay, jump start BOSCHS
008 910 64 BOMAG 389

7.1 Wiring diagram

M01 002 10 Starter Starter 60A/10A
M02 006 2 Berieselungspumpe Sprinkler pump 76.8W
M04 006 9 Scheibenwischermotor vorne Windscreen wiper motor, front 60W
M05 006 11 Scheibenwischermotor hinten Windscreen wiper motor, rear 21.6W
M06 006 13 Scheibenwaschermotor vorne Windscreen washer motor, front 12W
M07 006 13 Scheibenwaschermotor hinten Windscreen washer motor, rear 12W
M13 006 16 Geblaese Heizung Blower heating
P00 004 3 Betriebsstundenzaehler Operating hour meter 0.05W

P01 004 18 Tankanzeige Level gauge 0.8W
P04 006 5 Geschwindigkeitsanzeige Speedometer
P14 004 15 Anzeige Kuehlmitteltemperatur Temperature gauge, coolant 0.8W
P24 004 16 Anzeige Getriebeoeltemperatur Temperature gauge, gear lubr. oil 0.8W
P25 004 19 Anzeige Getriebeoeldruck Pressure gauge, gear lubr. oil 0.8W
Kneip
23.9.03
Nallin
23. 9. 3
R03 004 17 Geber Tankanzeige Sender, level gauge

R09 002 4 Vorwiderstand Dropping resistor 3.3_O (4x6)
R09 004 3 Vorwiderstand Dropping resistor 82_O 10W
R20 004 6 Widerstand Resistor 100 OHM
R20 004 6 Widerstand Resistor
S00 002 12 Startschalter Starter switch

S03 005 20 Taster Signalhorn Push button, warning horn
S05 006 3 Berieselungsschalter Switch, sprinkler system
S14 005 3 Warnblinkschalter Switch, hazard light
S15 005 12 Beleuchtungsschalter StVZO Switch, lighting StVZO
S17 005 7 Schalter Blinker links Switch, indicator, lh.
S18 005 10 Schalter Blinker rechts Switch, indicator, rh.
S20 006 10 Schalter Scheibenwischer vorne Switch, windscreen wiper, front
S21 006 11 Schalter Scheibenwischer hinten Switch, windscreen wiper, rear
S26 005 1 Schalter Arbeitsbeleuchtung hinten Switch, working head lights, rear
S30 002 9 Batterietrennschalter Switch, battery disconnect
S38 005 16 Schalter Kennleuchte Switch, warning light
component listing
S44 006 15 Schalter Kabinenluefter Switch, cabin ventilator

S45 005 17 Schalter Kabineninnenleuchte Switch, cabin inside light
Bauteilliste
S45 005 18 Schalter Kabineninnenleuchte Switch, cabin inside light

S102 006 19 Schalter Klimaanlage Switch air conditioning
S111 002 18 Schalter Feststellbremse Switch, parking brake
S125 002 16 Schalter NOT AUS, links Switch, emergency off,lh.
S126 002 16 Schalter NOT AUS, rechts Switch, emergency off,rh.
S141 005 19 Taster Signalhorn Push button, warning horn
S142 003 5 Fahrhebel links Travel lever, lh
S143 003 5 Fahrhebel rechts Travel lever, rh
S145 006 13 Taster Scheibenwascher Push button,windscreen washer
S146 006 19 Endschalter Heizung Limit switch, heater
V01 003 15 Diode Diode Diodenmodul

V09 004 10 Diode Diode in A15
V10 006 19 Diode Diode
V12 002 15 Diode Diode 1.5KE36CA
V13 004 2 Diode Diode Wago UF4004
V13 201 17 Diode Diode WAGO UF4004
V14 002 17 Diode Diode 1.5KE36CA
V15 004 10 Diode Diode in A15
V18 002 1 Diode Diode Kabeldiode
X1:12 004 7 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box

2

X1:16a 004 4 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box
X1:16a 004 4 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box
4

380 114 39

102

X3:33,34 002 16 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box
390 BOMAG 008 910 64

Wiring diagram 7.1
X3:33.34 005 16 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box
Kneip
23.9.03
Nallin
23. 9. 3

component listing
XS 002 7 Steckdose Socket

X10:1 003 8 An A66 to A66
Bauteilliste
X10:2 003 8 An A66 to A66

X10:3 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:4 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:5 003 9 An A66 to A66
X10:6 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:7 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:8 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:9 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:10 003 8 An A66 to A66
X10:13 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:14 003 9 An A66 to A66
X10:15 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:16 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:17 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:18 003 10 An A66 to A66
X10:21ï24 003 8 An A66 to A66
X11:1 004 17 Geber Tankanzeige sender level gauge
X11:2 004 18 Geber Tankanzeige sender level gauge
X12:1 006 2 Berieselungspumpe sprinkler pump
X12:2 006 2 Berieselungspumpe sprinkler pump
X13:1 006 15 Heizung/Klima heating/air conditioning
X13:2 006 20 Heizung/Klima heating/air conditioning
X15:1 005 12 Beleuchtung vorn Illumination front
X16:1 005 9 Bel. hinten links illumination back lh
3
X17:1 005 11 Bel. hinten rechts illumination, back rh

4
X18:1 003 11 an Y03/Y130 to Y03/Y130

X18:2 003 11 an Y03/Y130 to Y03/Y130
X18:3 003 13 an Y03/Y130 to Y03/Y130
X18:4 003 13 an Y03/Y130 to Y03/Y130
380 114 39
X19:1 002 13 an Y13 to Y13

X19:2 002 14 an Y13 to Y13
X19:4 002 14 an Y13 to Y13
X20:1 005 18 Kabine cabin
103

008 910 64 BOMAG 391

7.1 Wiring diagram

X22:1 006 8 Kabine, Bel. vorn cabin, illum. front
Kneip
23.9.03
Nallin
23. 9. 3

X23:1 006 11 Kabine, Bel. hinten cabin, illum. back
X25:1 006 19 Klimaanlage air conditioning
X26:1 003 5 Linker Fahrhebel left travel lever
X28:1 003 4 Rechter Fahrhebel right travel lever
X31:1 002 10 Generator generator
X31:2 002 10 Generator generator
X33:1 003 16 an Y16/Y17 to Y16/Y17
X33:2 003 16 an Y16/Y17 to Y16/Y17
X33:3 003 18 an Y16/Y17 to Y16/Y17
X33:4 003 18 an Y16/Y17 to Y16/Y17
component listing

Bauteilliste

X41:1 002 12 Zündstartschalter ignition switch
X56:A 006 7 3pol Deutsch 3pol Deutsch
X56:B 006 6 3pol Deutsch 3pol Deutsch
X56:C 006 6 3pol Deutsch 3pol Deutsch
X100:31ï 002 1 NATO Steckdose NATO socket
X100:30+ 002 4 NATO Steckdose NATO socket
X101:1 002 1 Deutsch 2pol Deutsch 2pol
4
X101:2 002 1 Deutsch 2pol Deutsch 2pol

X103:+12V 002 5 Modul A82 Modul A82
X103:+24V 002 4 Modul A82 Modul A82
X103:+H83 002 1 Modul A82 Modul A82
X103:ï 002 4 Modul A82 Modul A82
4
X:55 006 7 Elektrokasten Crossïbonding box
Y03 003 11 Magnetventil Fahrstufenumschaltung Solenoid valve, speed range selector

Y04 002 17 Magnetventil Bremse Solenoid valve, brake 30W
380 114 39
Y13 002 14 Hubmagnet Motor Shut off solenoid, engine 12W

Y15 006 20 Magnetkupplung Klimakompressor Magnetic clutch, air conditioning compr. 45W
Y16 003 16 Magnetventil Fahrtrichtung vorwaerts Solenoid valve, travel direction forw.
Y17 003 18 Magnetventil Fahrtrichtung rueckwaerts Solenoid valve, travel direction backw.
Y130 003 13 Magnetventil Fahrstufenumschaltung Solenoid valve, speed range selector
104
392 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64
Wiring diagram
A15
Sicherungen/fuses
K61
K23
K24
K42
K11 K32 A02
F01
F05
F07
F09
F10
F06
F41
F88
R09
Box A
F27
F31
F33
F11
F12
F04
F08
F77
Box B
Rückseite Armaturenblech
backside dashboard
Frontseite Armaturenblech
frontside dash board
Elektrokasten/cross bonding box
BOMAG
X9 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X2
X36
X37
X38
X39
X46
X40
X34
X32
X35
X42
X1
1
3
5
6
7
9
2
8
4
11
10
13
15
16
17
19
31
51
61
71
12
18
21
14
41
30
33
35
36
37
39
50
53
55
56
57
59
60
63
65
66
67
69
70
73
75
76
20
23
25
26
27
29
32
38
52
58
62
68
72
22
28
34
40
43
43
45
46
47
49
54
64
74
24
42
48
16a
A05
2
1
1
V13
V16
K48 K38 K39
2
2
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
V0
1
1
2
3
V0
X1 2
1
2
4
X43 X44 X9 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X2
X35
2
1
V0
5
3
2
6
V0
4
1 1
V..
1
2 2
8
V..
1
V..
V..
19.09.2003
Nallin Zentralelektrik 380 114 39
19.09.2003
Kneip 0512 cross bonding box 201
7.1
393
7.1 Wiring diagram
394 BOMAG 008 910 64

7.2 Pneumatic diagram
008 910 64 BOMAG 395

396 BOMAG 008 910 64

1 Air Dryer with
pressure relief
valve
2 Tyre pressure
Control Valves
008 910 64
3 Pressure relief
valve
4,5 +/-0,2 bar 6,5 bar
4 Shuttle valve
Pneumatic diagram
5 Water separator
6 Brake valve
8 Pressure air
5,2 +/- 0,2 bar reservoir
9 Solenoid valve
10 Check valves
BOMAG
11 Pressure switch
12 Pressure switch
13 Spring brake
cylinder
5,0 +/-0,5 bar 15 Test port
16. Tyre manometer
17 Brake
manometer
PNEUMATIC LINES 19 Booster
5,3 bar HYDRAULIC LINES

7.2
397
398 BOMAG 008 910 64

8 Supplement to circuit diagram
008 910 64 BOMAG 399

8.1 Control elements in circuit diagram
8.1 Control elements in circuit di-

agram
Fig. 28
400 BOMAG 008 910 64

Control elements in circuit diagram 8.1
Pos. Designation in circuit diagram Designation in circuit diagram
1 P14 / E02 Gauge, coolant temperature / illumination
2 P24 Gauge, transmission oil temperature
3 P25 / E45 Gauge, transmission oil pressure / illumination
4 E62 Illumination, brake pressure gauge
5 E61 Illumination, tire pressure gauge
6 A15 Monitoring board
7 P01 / E01 Tank gauge / illumination
8 P00 Operating hour meter
9 H61 / H62 Control light steering, right / left
10 S15 Light switch
11 S26 Switch for working lights, rear
12 S05 Switch for sprinkling system
13 A01 Sprinkling system interval switch
14 S111 Parking brake switch
15 A14 Hazard light switch
16 S38 Switch for flashing beacon
17 S17 / S18 Switch, indicators left / right
18 S125 / S126 Emergency stop switch, left / right
19 F01.... F41 Fuses
20 S141 / S03 Button for warning horn
23 S30 Battery disconnecting switch
24 S00 Start switch
27 S142 / S143 Travel lever, left / right
008 910 64 BOMAG 401

8.1 Control elements in circuit diagram
Fig. 29

a S20 Switch front windscreen wiper
b Switch rear windscreen wiper
c S145 Push button, windscreen wiper
402 BOMAG 008 910 64

Control elements in circuit diagram 8.1
Fig. 30

d S44 Switch cabin fan
e S102 Switch for air conditioning
008 910 64 BOMAG 403

8.2 Monitoring module A15 in circuit diagram
8.2 Monitoring module A15 in cir-

cuit diagram
Fig. 31

1 H01 Brake control light
2 H43 Brake pressure control light
3 H06 Hazard light control light
4 H05 Indicator control light
5 H59, not connected Differential lock control light
6 H22 Sprinkler system control light
7
8 H11 Control light, travel lever "0"-position
9 H15 Control light for engine air filter
10 H09 Engine oil pressure control light
11 not used
12 H08 Charge control light
404 BOMAG 008 910 64

Service - Manual: Catalogue Number

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service - Manual: Catalogue Number

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service - Manual: Catalogue Number

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service - Manual

Rubber tire roller

008 910 64 BOMAG 3

Supplement to circuit diagram 399

4 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64 BOMAG 5

6 BOMAG 008 910 64

auxiliary equipment must be fully functional and in

008 910 64 BOMAG 7

8 BOMAG 008 910 64

Handling pressure vessels

008 910 64 BOMAG 9

General ● Fill new hydraulic units with hydraulic oil before

10 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64 BOMAG 11

12 BOMAG 008 910 64

Self-locking nuts must be generally renewed.

Tightening torques for screws with metric unified thread

Tightening torque Nm* (ft-lb)

Tightening torques Nm1 (ft-lb)

008 910 64 BOMAG 13

14 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64 BOMAG 15

BOMAG Central Service - Technical data and adjustment values

Powershift reversing transmission:

17 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64 BOMAG 18

19 BOMAG 008 910 64

No. Designation Note

Every 10 operating hours

008 910 64 BOMAG 20

No. Designation Note

21 BOMAG 008 910 64

Assembly Fuel or lubricant Quantity approx.

Summer Winter Attention

Engine Engine oil CCMC-D4 or without oil filter change

API: CE/SG approx. 15,5 litres

(-15 °C to +40 °C)

Diesel Winter diesel fuel approx. 250 litres

Powershift transmission ATF Dexron II D approx. 22 litres

(-34 °C to +60 °C)

Cooling system Coolant approx. 15 litres

Sprinkler system Water approx. 400 litres

Lubrication points lithium saponified multi-purpose grease, penetration as required

2.4 Fuels and lubricants

008 910 64 BOMAG 22

23 BOMAG 008 910 64

008 910 64 BOMAG 24

008 910 64 BOMAG 25

Fig. 3 Table of contents

008 910 64 BOMAG 27

Function groups ● From top (plus potential) to bottom (minus poten-

Fig. 4 Function groups Relay cross reference

28 BOMAG 008 910 64

Fig. 5 Current paths

Fig. 6 List of components

Component cross references

008 910 64 BOMAG 29

Graphic symbol serves the purpose of global understanding and fault